Ts 13810102v160400p

ETSI TS 138 101-2 V16.4.
0 (2020-07)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
5G;
NR;
User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception;
Part 2: Range 2 Standalone
(3GPP TS 38.101-2 version 16.4.0 Release 16)
3GPP TS 38.101-2 version 16.4.0 Release 16 1 ETSI TS 138 101-2 V16.4.0 (2020-07)
Reference
RTS/TSGR-0438101-2vG40
Keywords
5G
ETSI
650 Route des Lucioles

F-06921 Sophia Antipolis Cedex - FRANCE
Tel.: +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16
Siret N° 348 623 562 00017 - NAF 742 C

Association à but non lucratif enregistrée à la
Sous-Préfecture de Grasse (06) N° 7803/88
Important notice
The present document can be downloaded from:

http://www.etsi.org/standards-search
The present document may be made available in electronic versions and/or in print. The content of any electronic and/or
print versions of the present document shall not be modified without the prior written authorization of ETSI. In case of any
existing or perceived difference in contents between such versions and/or in print, the prevailing version of an ETSI
deliverable is the one made publicly available in PDF format at www.etsi.org/deliver.
Users of the present document should be aware that the document may be subject to revision or change of status.
Information on the current status of this and other ETSI documents is available at
https://portal.etsi.org/TB/ETSIDeliverableStatus.aspx
If you find errors in the present document, please send your comment to one of the following services:
https://portal.etsi.org/People/CommiteeSupportStaff.aspx
Copyright Notification
No part may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying
and microfilm except as authorized by written permission of ETSI.
The content of the PDF version shall not be modified without the written authorization of ETSI.
The copyright and the foregoing restriction extend to reproduction in all media.
© ETSI 2020.
All rights reserved.
DECT™, PLUGTESTS™, UMTS™ and the ETSI logo are trademarks of ETSI registered for the benefit of its Members.
3GPP™ and LTE™ are trademarks of ETSI registered for the benefit of its Members and
of the 3GPP Organizational Partners.
oneM2M™ logo is a trademark of ETSI registered for the benefit of its Members and
of the oneM2M Partners.
GSM® and the GSM logo are trademarks registered and owned by the GSM Association.
ETSI
Intellectual Property Rights

Essential patents
IPRs essential or potentially essential to normative deliverables may have been declared to ETSI. The information
pertaining to these essential IPRs, if any, is publicly available for ETSI members and non-members, and can be found
in ETSI SR 000 314: "Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs); Essential, or potentially Essential, IPRs notified to ETSI in
respect of ETSI standards", which is available from the ETSI Secretariat. Latest updates are available on the ETSI Web
server (https://ipr.etsi.org/).
Pursuant to the ETSI IPR Policy, no investigation, including IPR searches, has been carried out by ETSI. No guarantee
can be given as to the existence of other IPRs not referenced in ETSI SR 000 314 (or the updates on the ETSI Web
server) which are, or may be, or may become, essential to the present document.
Trademarks
The present document may include trademarks and/or tradenames which are asserted and/or registered by their owners.
ETSI claims no ownership of these except for any which are indicated as being the property of ETSI, and conveys no
right to use or reproduce any trademark and/or tradename. Mention of those trademarks in the present document does
not constitute an endorsement by ETSI of products, services or organizations associated with those trademarks.
Legal Notice
This Technical Specification (TS) has been produced by ETSI 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP).
The present document may refer to technical specifications or reports using their 3GPP identities. These shall be
interpreted as being references to the corresponding ETSI deliverables.
The cross reference between 3GPP and ETSI identities can be found under http://webapp.etsi.org/key/queryform.asp.
Modal verbs terminology

In the present document "shall", "shall not", "should", "should not", "may", "need not", "will", "will not", "can" and
"cannot" are to be interpreted as described in clause 3.2 of the ETSI Drafting Rules (Verbal forms for the expression of
provisions).
"must" and "must not" are NOT allowed in ETSI deliverables except when used in direct citation.
ETSI
Contents
Intellectual Property Rights ................................................................................................................................2
Legal Notice .......................................................................................................................................................2
Modal verbs terminology....................................................................................................................................2
Foreword...........................................................................................................................................................10
1 Scope ......................................................................................................................................................12
2 References ..............................................................................................................................................12
3 Definitions, symbols and abbreviations .................................................................................................13
3.1 Definitions ........................................................................................................................................................ 13
3.2 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................ 14
3.3 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................................... 16
4 General ...................................................................................................................................................17
4.1 Relationship between minimum requirements and test requirements .............................................................. 17
4.2 Applicability of minimum requirements .......................................................................................................... 17
4.3 Specification suffix information ....................................................................................................................... 17
5 Operating bands and channel arrangement.............................................................................................18
5.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 18
5.2 Operating bands................................................................................................................................................ 18
5.2A Operating bands for CA ................................................................................................................................... 18
5.2A.1 Intra-band CA ............................................................................................................................................. 18
5.2A.2 Void ............................................................................................................................................................ 19
5.2D Operating bands for UL MIMO ....................................................................................................................... 19
5.3 UE Channel bandwidth .................................................................................................................................... 19
5.3.1 General........................................................................................................................................................ 19
5.3.2 Maximum transmission bandwidth configuration ...................................................................................... 20
5.3.3 Minimum guardband and transmission bandwidth configuration............................................................... 20
5.3.4 RB alignment .............................................................................................................................................. 21
5.3A UE channel bandwidth for CA ......................................................................................................................... 22
5.3A.1 General........................................................................................................................................................ 22
5.3A.2 Minimum guardband and transmission bandwidth configuration for CA .................................................. 22
5.3A.3 RB alignment with different numerologies for CA..................................................................................... 24
5.3A.4 UE channel bandwidth per operating band for CA ..................................................................................... 24
5.3D Channel bandwidth for UL MIMO................................................................................................................... 25
5.4 Channel arrangement ........................................................................................................................................ 25
5.4.1 Channel spacing .......................................................................................................................................... 25
5.4.1.1 Channel spacing for adjacent NR carriers ............................................................................................. 25
5.4.2 Channel raster ............................................................................................................................................. 25
5.4.2.1 NR-ARFCN and channel raster............................................................................................................. 25
5.4.2.2 Channel raster to resource element mapping......................................................................................... 26
5.4.2.3 Channel raster entries for each operating band ..................................................................................... 26
5.4.3 Synchronization raster ................................................................................................................................ 27
5.4.3.1 Synchronization raster and numbering .................................................................................................. 27
5.4.3.2 Synchronization raster to synchronization block resource element mapping........................................ 27
5.4.3.3 Synchronization raster entries for each operating band......................................................................... 27
5.4A Channel arrangement for CA............................................................................................................................ 28
5.4A.1 Channel spacing for CA .............................................................................................................................. 28
5.5 Configurations .................................................................................................................................................. 29
5.5A Configurations for CA ...................................................................................................................................... 29
5.5A.1 Configurations for intra-band contiguous CA............................................................................................. 29
5.5A.2 Configurations for intra-band non-contiguous CA ..................................................................................... 34
5.5D Configurations for UL MIMO .......................................................................................................................... 46
6 Transmitter characteristics .....................................................................................................................47
6.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 47
ETSI
6.2 Transmitter power ............................................................................................................................................ 47

6.2.1 UE maximum output power ........................................................................................................................ 47
6.2.1.0 General .................................................................................................................................................. 47
6.2.1.1 UE maximum output power for power class 1 ...................................................................................... 47
6.2.2 UE maximum output power reduction ........................................................................................................ 51
6.2.2.1 UE maximum output power reduction for power class 1 ...................................................................... 51
6.2.3 UE maximum output power with additional requirements ......................................................................... 54
6.2.3.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 54
6.2.3.2 A-MPR for NS_201 .............................................................................................................................. 55
6.2.3.2.1 A-MPR for NS_201 for power class 1 ............................................................................................ 55
6.2.3.3 A-MPR for NS_202 .............................................................................................................................. 55
6.2.4 Configured transmitted power .................................................................................................................... 56
6.2A Transmitter power for CA ................................................................................................................................ 57
6.2A.1 UE maximum output power for CA............................................................................................................ 57
6.2A.2 UE maximum output power reduction for CA............................................................................................ 57
6.2A.2.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 57
6.2A.2.2 Maximum output power reduction for power class 1 ............................................................................ 57
6.2A.3 UE maximum output power with additional requirements for CA ............................................................. 59
6.2A.3.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 59
6.2A.3.2 A-MPR for CA_NS_201 ....................................................................................................................... 60
6.2A.3.2.1 A-MPR for CA_NS_201 for power class 1 ..................................................................................... 60
6.2A.3.3 A-MPR for CA_NS_202 ....................................................................................................................... 61
6.2A.4 Configured transmitted power for CA ........................................................................................................ 61
6.2D Transmitter power for UL MIMO .................................................................................................................... 62
6.2D.1 UE maximum output power for UL MIMO................................................................................................ 62
6.2D.1.1 UE maximum output power for UL MIMO for power class 1 .............................................................. 62
6.2D.2 UE maximum output power reduction for modulation / channel bandwidth for UL MIMO ...................... 66
6.2D.2.1 UE maximum output power reduction for modulation / channel bandwidth for UL MIMO for
power class 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 66
power class 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 66
power class 3 ......................................................................................................................................... 66
power class 4 ......................................................................................................................................... 66
6.2D.3 UE maximum output power reduction with additional requirements for UL MIMO ................................. 67
ETSI
6.2D.3.1 UE maximum output power reduction with additional requirements for UL MIMO for power
class 1 .................................................................................................................................................... 67
class 2 .................................................................................................................................................... 67
class 3 .................................................................................................................................................... 67
class 4 .................................................................................................................................................... 67
6.2D.4 Configured transmitted power for UL MIMO ............................................................................................ 67
6.3 Output power dynamics.................................................................................................................................... 67
6.3.1 Minimum output power .............................................................................................................................. 67
6.3.1.0 General .................................................................................................................................................. 67
6.3.1.1 Minimum output power for power class 1 ............................................................................................ 67
6.3.1.2 Minimum output power for power class 2, 3, and 4.............................................................................. 68
6.3.2 Transmit OFF power ................................................................................................................................... 68
6.3.3 Transmit ON/OFF time mask ..................................................................................................................... 68
6.3.3.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 68
6.3.3.2 General ON/OFF time mask ................................................................................................................. 69
6.3.3.3 Transmit power time mask for slot and short or long subslot boundaries ............................................. 69
6.3.3.4 PRACH time mask ................................................................................................................................ 69
6.3.3.5 Void....................................................................................................................................................... 70
6.3.3.6 SRS time mask ...................................................................................................................................... 70
6.3.3.7 PUSCH-PUCCH and PUSCH-SRS time masks ................................................................................... 72
6.3.3.8 Transmit power time mask for consecutive slot or long subslot transmission and short subslot
transmission boundaries ........................................................................................................................ 72
6.3.3.9 Transmit power time mask for consecutive short subslot transmissions boundaries ............................ 72
6.3.4 Power control .............................................................................................................................................. 73
6.3.4.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 73
6.3.4.2 Absolute power tolerance ...................................................................................................................... 73
6.3.4.3 Relative power tolerance ....................................................................................................................... 74
6.3.4.4 Aggregate power tolerance.................................................................................................................... 75
6.3A Output power dynamics for CA ....................................................................................................................... 75
6.3A.1 Minimum output power for CA .................................................................................................................. 75
6.3A.1.0 General .................................................................................................................................................. 75
6.3A.1.1 Minimum output power for power class 1 ............................................................................................ 75
6.3A.1.2 Minimum output power for power class 2, 3, and 4.............................................................................. 76
6.3A.2 Transmit OFF power for CA....................................................................................................................... 76
6.3A.3 Transmit ON/OFF time mask for CA ......................................................................................................... 76
6.3A.4 Power control for CA .................................................................................................................................. 76
6.3A.4.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 76
6.3D Output power dynamics for UL MIMO ........................................................................................................... 77
6.3D.1 Minimum output power for UL MIMO ...................................................................................................... 77
6.3D.1.1 Minimum output power for UL MIMO for power class 1 .................................................................... 77
6.3D.1.2 Minimum output power for UL MIMO for power class 2, 3 and 4....................................................... 77
6.3D.2 Transmit OFF power for UL MIMO........................................................................................................... 77
6.3D.3 Transmit ON/OFF time mask for UL MIMO ............................................................................................. 78
6.4 Transmit signal quality ..................................................................................................................................... 78
6.4.1 Frequency Error .......................................................................................................................................... 78
6.4.2 Transmit modulation quality ....................................................................................................................... 78
6.4.2.0 General .................................................................................................................................................. 78
6.4.2.1 Error vector magnitude ......................................................................................................................... 78
6.4.2.2 Carrier leakage ...................................................................................................................................... 79
6.4.2.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 79
6.4.2.2.2 Carrier leakage for power class 1 .................................................................................................... 79
6.4.2.3 In-band emissions ................................................................................................................................. 80
6.4.2.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 80
6.4.2.3.2 In-band emissions for power class 1 ................................................................................................ 80
ETSI

6.4.2.4 EVM equalizer spectrum flatness ......................................................................................................... 84
6.4.2.5 EVM spectral flatness for Pi/2 BPSK modulation ................................................................................ 85
6.4A Transmit signal quality for CA ......................................................................................................................... 86
6.4A.1 Frequency error ........................................................................................................................................... 86
6.4A.2 Transmit modulation quality ....................................................................................................................... 86
6.4A.2.0 General .................................................................................................................................................. 86
6.4A.2.1 Error Vector magnitude......................................................................................................................... 87
6.4A.2.2 Carrier leakage ...................................................................................................................................... 87
6.4A.2.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 87
6.4A.2.2.2 Carrier leakage for power class 1 .................................................................................................... 87
6.4A.2.3 Inband emissions ................................................................................................................................... 88
6.4A.2.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 88
6.4A.2.3.2 Inband emissions for power class 1 ................................................................................................. 88
6.4A.2.4 EVM equalizer spectrum flatness ......................................................................................................... 91
6.4D Transmit signal quality for UL MIMO ............................................................................................................. 91
6.4D.0 General........................................................................................................................................................ 91
6.4D.1 Frequency error for UL MIMO................................................................................................................... 91
6.4D.2 Transmit modulation quality for UL MIMO............................................................................................... 91
6.4D.3 Time alignment error for UL MIMO .......................................................................................................... 92
6.4D.4 Requirements for coherent UL MIMO ....................................................................................................... 92
6.5 Output RF spectrum emissions ......................................................................................................................... 92
6.5.1 Occupied bandwidth ................................................................................................................................... 92
6.5.2 Out of band emissions................................................................................................................................. 93
6.5.2.0 General .................................................................................................................................................. 93
6.5.2.1 Spectrum emission mask ....................................................................................................................... 93
6.5.2.2 Void....................................................................................................................................................... 93
6.5.2.3 Adjacent channel leakage ratio ............................................................................................................. 93
6.5.3 Spurious emissions ..................................................................................................................................... 94
6.5.3.1 Spurious emission band UE co-existence ............................................................................................. 95
6.5.3.2 Additional spurious emissions .............................................................................................................. 95
6.5.3.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 95
6.5.3.2.2 Additional spurious emission requirements for NS_201 ................................................................. 95
6.5.3.2.3 Additional spurious emission requirements for NS_202 ................................................................. 96
6.5A Output RF spectrum emissions for CA............................................................................................................. 96
6.5A.1 Occupied bandwidth for CA ....................................................................................................................... 96
6.5A.2 Out of band emissions................................................................................................................................. 96
6.5A.2.1 Spectrum emission mask for CA ........................................................................................................... 96
6.5A.2.3 Adjacent channel leakage ratio for CA ................................................................................................. 97
6.5A.2.3 Adjacent channel leakage ratio for CA ................................................................................................. 97
6.5A.3 Spurious emissions for CA ......................................................................................................................... 97
6.5A.3.1 Spurious emission band UE co-existence for CA ................................................................................. 97
6.5A.3.2 Additional spurious emissions .............................................................................................................. 98
6.5A.3.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 98
6.5A.3.2.2 Additional spurious emission requirements for CA_NS_201 ......................................................... 98
6.5A.3.2.3 Additional spurious emission requirements for CA_NS_202 ......................................................... 98
6.5D Output RF spectrum emissions for UL MIMO................................................................................................. 98
6.5D.1 Occupied bandwidth for UL MIMO ........................................................................................................... 98
6.5D.2 Out of band emissions for UL MIMO ........................................................................................................ 99
6.5D.3 Spurious emissions for UL MIMO ............................................................................................................. 99
6.6 Beam correspondence....................................................................................................................................... 99
6.6.1 General........................................................................................................................................................ 99
6.6.2 (Void).......................................................................................................................................................... 99
6.6.3 (Void).......................................................................................................................................................... 99
6.6.4 Beam correspondence for power class 3 ..................................................................................................... 99
6.6.4.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 99
ETSI
6.6.4.2 Beam correspondence tolerance for power class 3................................................................................ 99

6.6.4.3 Side Conditions ................................................................................................................................... 100
6.6.4.3.1 Side Condition for SSB and CSI-RS ................................................................................................... 100
6.6.5 (Void)........................................................................................................................................................ 101
6.6A Beam correspondence for CA ........................................................................................................................ 101
7 Receiver characteristics ........................................................................................................................102
7.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 102
7.2 Diversity characteristics ................................................................................................................................. 102
7.3 Reference sensitivity ...................................................................................................................................... 102
7.3.1 General...................................................................................................................................................... 102
7.3.2 Reference sensitivity power level ............................................................................................................. 102
7.3.2.1 Reference sensitivity power level for power class 1 ........................................................................... 102
7.3.3 Void .......................................................................................................................................................... 104
7.3.4 EIS spherical coverage.............................................................................................................................. 104
7.3.4.3 EIS spherical coverage for power class 3 ............................................................................................ 105
7.3A Reference sensitivity for CA .......................................................................................................................... 106
7.3A.1 General...................................................................................................................................................... 106
7.3A.2 Reference sensitivity power level for CA ................................................................................................. 106
7.3A.2.1 Intra-band contiguous CA ................................................................................................................... 106
7.3D Reference sensitivity for UL MIMO .............................................................................................................. 107
7.4 Maximum input level ..................................................................................................................................... 107
7.4A Maximum input level for CA ......................................................................................................................... 107
7.4A.1 Maximum input level for Intra-band contiguous CA ................................................................................ 107
7.4A.2 Maximum input level for Intra-band non-contiguous CA ........................................................................ 108
7.4A.3 void ........................................................................................................................................................... 108
7.4D Maximum input level for UL MIMO ............................................................................................................. 108
7.5 Adjacent channel selectivity ........................................................................................................................... 108
7.5A Adjacent channel selectivity for CA............................................................................................................... 110
7.5A.1 Adjacent channel selectivity for Intra-band contiguous CA ..................................................................... 110
7.5A.2 Adjacent channel selectivity for Intra-band non-contiguous CA .............................................................. 111
7.5A.3 void ........................................................................................................................................................... 111
7.5D Adjacent channel selectivity for UL MIMO................................................................................................... 111
7.6 Blocking characteristics ................................................................................................................................. 112
7.6.1 General...................................................................................................................................................... 112
7.6.2 In-band blocking ....................................................................................................................................... 112
7.6.3 Void .......................................................................................................................................................... 113
7.6A Blocking characteristics for CA ..................................................................................................................... 113
7.6A.1 General...................................................................................................................................................... 113
7.6A.2 In-band blocking ....................................................................................................................................... 113
7.6A.2.2 In-band blocking for Intra-band non-contiguous CA .......................................................................... 114
7.6A.2.3 void ..................................................................................................................................................... 114
7.6D Blocking characteristics for UL MIMO ......................................................................................................... 114
7.7 Void ................................................................................................................................................................ 114
7.8 Void ................................................................................................................................................................ 114
7.9 Spurious emissions ......................................................................................................................................... 114
7.10 Void ................................................................................................................................................................ 115
Annex A (normative): Measurement channels ................................................................................116

A.1 General .................................................................................................................................................116
A.2 UL reference measurement channels ...................................................................................................116
A.2.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 116
A.2.2 Void ................................................................................................................................................................ 116
A.2.3 Reference measurement channels for TDD .................................................................................................... 117
A.2.3.1 DFT-s-OFDM Pi/2-BPSK ........................................................................................................................ 118
A.2.3.2 DFT-s-OFDM QPSK ................................................................................................................................ 120
A.2.3.3 DFT-s-OFDM 16QAM ............................................................................................................................. 122
A.2.3.4 DFT-s-OFDM 64QAM ............................................................................................................................. 124
ETSI
A.2.3.5 CP-OFDM QPSK ..................................................................................................................................... 126

A.2.3.6 CP-OFDM 16QAM .................................................................................................................................. 128
A.2.3.7 CP-OFDM 64QAM .................................................................................................................................. 130
A.3 DL reference measurement channels ...................................................................................................132
A.3.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 132
A.3.2 Void ................................................................................................................................................................ 134
A.3.3 DL reference measurement channels for TDD ............................................................................................... 134
A.3.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 134
A.3.3.2 FRC for receiver requirements for QPSK ........................................................................................... 135
A.3.3.3 FRC for receiver requirements for 16QAM ........................................................................................ 136
A.3.3.4 FRC for receiver requirements for 64QAM ........................................................................................ 137
A.3.3.5 FRC for receiver requirements for 256QAM ...................................................................................... 139
A.4 Void ................................................................................................................................................................ 141
A.5 OFDMA Channel Noise Generator (OCNG) ................................................................................................. 141
A.5.1 OCNG Patterns for FDD........................................................................................................................... 141
A.5.2 OCNG Patterns for TDD .......................................................................................................................... 141
A.5.2.1 OCNG TDD pattern 1: Generic OCNG TDD Pattern for all unused REs .......................................... 141
Annex B (informative): Void ...............................................................................................................142

Annex C (normative): Downlink physical channels .......................................................................143
C.1 General .................................................................................................................................................143
C.2 Setup .....................................................................................................................................................143
C.3 Connection ...........................................................................................................................................143
C.3.1 Measurement of Receiver Characteristics ...................................................................................................... 143
Annex D (normative): Characteristics of the interfering signal ....................................................144

D.1 General .................................................................................................................................................144
D.2 Interference signals...............................................................................................................................144
Annex E (normative): Environmental conditions ...........................................................................145
E.1 General .................................................................................................................................................145
E.2 Environmental ......................................................................................................................................145
E.2.1 Temperature ................................................................................................................................................... 145
E.2.2 Voltage ........................................................................................................................................................... 145
E.2.3 Void ................................................................................................................................................................ 146
Annex F (normative): Transmit modulation ...................................................................................147

F.1 Measurement Point ...............................................................................................................................147
F.2 Basic Error Vector Magnitude measurement ................................................................................................. 147
F.3 Basic in-band emissions measurement .................................................................................................147
F.4 Modified signal under test ....................................................................................................................148
F.5 Window length .....................................................................................................................................150
F.5.1 Timing offset .................................................................................................................................................. 150
F.5.2 Window length ............................................................................................................................................... 150
F.5.3 Window length for normal CP ....................................................................................................................... 150
F.5.4 Window length for Extended CP .................................................................................................................... 151
F.5.5 Window length for PRACH ........................................................................................................................... 151
F.6 Averaged EVM ....................................................................................................................................152
F.7 Spectrum Flatness ................................................................................................................................153
Annex G (informative): Void ...............................................................................................................154
Annex H (Normative) .....................................................................................................................................155
ETSI
Modified MPR behavior .................................................................................................................................155

H.1 Indication of modified MPR behavior..................................................................................................155
Annex H (normative): Modified MPR behavior ..............................................................................156
H.1 Indication of modified MPR behavior..................................................................................................156
Annex I (informative): Void ...............................................................................................................157
Annex J (normative): UE coordinate system ..................................................................................158
J.1 Reference coordinate system ................................................................................................................158
J.2 Test conditions and angle definitions ...................................................................................................159
J.3 DUT positioning guidelines .................................................................................................................163
Annex K (informative): Void ...............................................................................................................165
Annex L (informative): Change history ............................................................................................166
History ............................................................................................................................................................175
ETSI
Foreword
This Technical Specification has been produced by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP).
The contents of the present document are subject to continuing work within the TSG and may change following formal
TSG approval. Should the TSG modify the contents of the present document, it will be re-released by the TSG with an
identifying change of release date and an increase in version number as follows:
Version x.y.z
where:
x the first digit:
1 presented to TSG for information;
2 presented to TSG for approval;
3 or greater indicates TSG approved document under change control.
y the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance, i.e. technical enhancements, corrections,
updates, etc.
z the third digit is incremented when editorial only changes have been incorporated in the document.
In the present document, modal verbs have the following meanings:
shall indicates a mandatory requirement to do something
shall not indicates an interdiction (prohibition) to do something
The constructions "shall" and "shall not" are confined to the context of normative provisions, and do not appear in
Technical Reports.
The constructions "must" and "must not" are not used as substitutes for "shall" and "shall not". Their use is avoided
insofar as possible, and they are not used in a normative context except in a direct citation from an external, referenced,
non-3GPP document, or so as to maintain continuity of style when extending or modifying the provisions of such a
referenced document.
should indicates a recommendation to do something
should not indicates a recommendation not to do something
may indicates permission to do something
need not indicates permission not to do something
The construction "may not" is ambiguous and is not used in normative elements. The unambiguous constructions
"might not" or "shall not" are used instead, depending upon the meaning intended.
can indicates that something is possible
cannot indicates that something is impossible
The constructions "can" and "cannot" are not substitutes for "may" and "need not".
will indicates that something is certain or expected to happen as a result of action taken by an agency
the behaviour of which is outside the scope of the present document
will not indicates that something is certain or expected not to happen as a result of action taken by an
agency the behaviour of which is outside the scope of the present document
might indicates a likelihood that something will happen as a result of action taken by some agency the
behaviour of which is outside the scope of the present document
ETSI
might not indicates a likelihood that something will not happen as a result of action taken by some agency
the behaviour of which is outside the scope of the present document
In addition:
is (or any other verb in the indicative mood) indicates a statement of fact
is not (or any other negative verb in the indicative mood) indicates a statement of fact
The constructions "is" and "is not" do not indicate requirements.
ETSI
1 Scope
The present document establishes the minimum RF requirements for NR User Equipment (UE) operating on frequency
Range 2.
2 References
The following documents contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the present
document.
- References are either specific (identified by date of publication, edition number, version number, etc.) or
non-specific.
- For a specific reference, subsequent revisions do not apply.
- For a non-specific reference, the latest version applies. In the case of a reference to a 3GPP document (including
a GSM document), a non-specific reference implicitly refers to the latest version of that document in the same
Release as the present document.
[1] 3GPP TR 21.905: "Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications".
[2] 3GPP TS 38.101-1: "NR; User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception; Part 1: Range 1
Standalone"
[3] 3GPP TS 38.101-3: "NR; User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception; Part 3: Range 1
and Range 2 Interworking operation with other radios"
[4] Void
[5] 3GPP TS 38.521-2: "NR; User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission
and reception; Part 2: Range 2 Standalone"
[6] Recommendation ITU-R M.1545: "Measurement uncertainty as it applies to test limits for the
terrestrial component of International Mobile Telecommunications-2000"
[7] ITU-R Recommendation SM.329-10, "Unwanted emissions in the spurious domain"
[8] 47 CFR Part 30, "UPPER MICROWAVE FLEXIBLE USE SERVICE, §30.202 Power limits",
FCC.
[9] 3GPP TS 38.211: "NR; Physical channels and modulation".
[10] 3GPP TS 38.213: "NR; Physical layer procedures for control".
[11] 3GPP TS 38.215: "NR; Physical layer measurements".
[12] 3GPP TS 38.133: "NR; Requirements for support of radio resource management".
[13] 3GPP TS 38.331: "NR; Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification".
[14] 3GPP TS 38.306: "NR; User Equipment (UE) radio access capabilities".
[15] IEEE Std 149: "IEEE Standard Test Procedures for Antennas", IEEE.
ETSI
3 Definitions, symbols and abbreviations
3.1 Definitions
For the purposes of the present document, the terms and definitions given in 3GPP TR 21.905 [1] and the following
apply. A term defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same term, if any, in 3GPP
TR 21.905 [1].
Aggregated Channel Bandwidth: The RF bandwidth in which a UE transmits and receives multiple contiguously
aggregated carriers.
Bidirectional spectrum: UL/DL common spectrum in which the UE supports the configuration of uplink or downlink
CCs.
Beam correspondence: the ability of the UE to select a suitable beam for UL transmission based on DL measurements
with or without relying on UL beam sweeping.
Carrier aggregation: Aggregation of two or more component carriers in order to support wider transmission
bandwidths.
Carrier aggregation band: A set of one or more operating bands across which multiple carriers are aggregated with a
specific set of technical requirements.
Carrier aggregation bandwidth class: A class defined by the aggregated transmission bandwidth configuration and
maximum number of component carriers supported by a UE.
Carrier aggregation configuration: A combination of CA operating band(s) and CA bandwidth class(es) supported by
a UE.
NOTE: Carriers aggregated in each band can be contiguous or non-contiguous.
EIRP(Link=Link angle, Meas=Link angle): measurement of the UE such that the link angle is aligned with the
measurement angle. EIRP (indicator to be measured) can be replaced by EIS, Frequency, EVM, carrier Leakage, In-
band eission and OBW.
EIRP(Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle): measurement of the EIRP of the UE such that the
measurement angle is aligned with the beam peak direction within an acceptable measurement error uncertainty. EIRP
(indicator to be measured) can be replaced by Frequency, EVM, carrier Leakage, In-band eission and OBW
EIRP(Link=Spherical coverage grid, Meas=Link angle): measurement of the EIRP spherical coverage of the UE
such that the EIRP link and measurement angles are aligned with the directions along the spherical coverage grid within
an acceptable measurement error uncertainty. Alternatively, the spherical coverage grid can be replaced by the beam
peak search grid as the results from the beam peak search can be re-used for spherical coverage.
EIS (equivalent isotropic sensitivity): sensitivity for an isotropic directivity device equivalent to the sensitivity of the
discussed device exposed to an incoming wave from a defined AoA
EIS(Link=RX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle): measurement of the EIS of the UE such that the
measurement angle is aligned with the RX beam peak direction within an acceptable measurement error uncertainty.
NOTE 1: The sensitivity is the minimum received power level at which specific requirement is met.
NOTE 2: Isotropic directivity is equal in all directions (i.e. 0 dBi).
Fallback group: Group of carrier aggregation bandwidth classes for which it is mandatory for a UE to be able to
fallback to lower order CA bandwidth class configuration. It is not mandatory for a UE to be able to fallback to lower
order CA bandwidth class configuration that belong to a different fallback group
Inter-band carrier aggregation: Carrier aggregation of component carriers in different operating bands.
NOTE: Carriers aggregated in each band can be contiguous or non-contiguous.
Intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation: Contiguous carriers aggregated in the same operating band.
ETSI
Intra-band non-contiguous carrier aggregation: Non-contiguous carriers aggregated in the same operating band.
Link angle: a DL-signal AoA from the view point of the UE, as described in Annex J. If the beam lock function is used
to lock the UE beam(s), the link angle can become any arbitrary AoA once the beam lock has been activated.
Measurement angle: the angle of measurement of the desired metric from the view point of the UE, as described in
Annex J
radiated interface boundary: operating band specific radiated requirements reference point where the radiated
requirements apply
radiated requirements reference point: for the RF measurement setup, the radiated requirements reference point is
located at the centre of the quiet zone. From the UE perspective the reference point is the input of the UE antenna array
RX beam peak direction: direction where the maximum total component of RSRP and thus best total component of
EIS is found
Sub-block: This is one contiguous allocated block of spectrum for transmission and reception by the same UE. There
may be multiple instances of sub-blocks within an RF bandwidth.
TX beam peak direction: direction where the maximum total component of EIRP is found
TRP(Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=TRP grid): measurement of the TRP of the UE such that the
measurement angles are aligned with the directions of the TRP grid points within an acceptable measurement
uncertainty while the link angle is aligned with the TX beam peak direction
NOTE: For requirements based on EIRP/EIS, the radiated interface boundary is associated to the far-field region
UE transmission bandwidth configuration: Set of resource blocks located within the UE channel bandwidth which
may be used for transmitting or receiving by the UE.
Vehicular UE: A UE embedded in a vehicle
3.2 Symbols
For the purposes of the present document, the following symbols apply:
∆EIRPBC The beam correspondence tolerance, where ∆EIRPBC = EIRP2 – EIRP1

ΔFGlobal Granularity of the global frequency raster
ΔFRaster Band dependent channel raster granularity
ΔfOOB Δ Frequency of Out Of Band emission
ΔRB The starting frequency offset between the allocated RB and the measured non-allocated RB
ΔRIB Allowed reference sensitivity relaxation due to support for inter-band CA operation
ΔMBP,n Allowed relaxation to each, minimum peak EIRP and reference sensitivity due to support for
multi-band operation, per band in a combination of supported bands
ΔMBS,n Allowed relaxation to each, EIRP spherical coverage and EIS spherical coverage due to support
for multi-band operation, per band in a combination of supported bands
BWChannel Channel bandwidth
BWChannel_CA Aggregated channel bandwidth, expressed in MHz
BWGB max( BWGB,Channel(k) )
BWGB,Channel(k) Minimum guard band defined in sub-clause 5.3A.2 of carrier k
BWinterferer Bandwidth of the interferer
Ceil(x) Rounding upwards; ceil(x) is the smallest integer such that ceil(x) ≥ x
EIRP1 The measured total EIRP based on the beam the UE chooses autonomously (corresponding beam)
to transmit in the direction of the incoming DL signal, which is based on beam correspondence
without relying on UL beam sweeping
EIRP2 The measured total EIRP based on the beam yielding highest EIRP in a given direction, which is
based on beam correspondence with relying on UL beam sweeping
EIRPmax The applicable maximum EIRP as specified in sub-clause 6.2.1
Floor(x) Rounding downwards; floor(x) is the greatest integer such that floor(x) ≤ x
F_center The center frequency of an allocated block of PRBs
FC RF reference frequency for the carrier center on the channel raster, given in table 5.4.2.2-1
FC,block, high Fc of the highest transmitted/received carrier in a sub-block.
ETSI
FC,block, low Fc of the lowest transmitted/received carrier in a sub-block.

FC, low The Fc of the lowest carrier, expressed in MHz.
FC, high The Fc of the highest carrier, expressed in MHz.
FDL_low The lowest frequency of the downlink operating band
FDL_high The highest frequency of the downlink operating band
Fedge,block,low The lower sub-block edge, where Fedge,block,low = FC,block,low - Foffset, low.
Fedge,block,high The upper sub-block edge, where Fedge,block,high = FC,block,high + Foffset, high.
Fedge, low The lower edge of Aggregated Channel Bandwidth, expressed in MHz. Fedge, low = FC, low - Foffset, low.
Fedge, high The upper edge of Aggregated Channel Bandwidth, expressed in MHz. Fedge, high = FC, high + Foffset,
high.
FInterferer Frequency of the interferer
FInterferer (offset) Frequency offset of the interferer (between the center frequency of the interferer and the carrier
frequency of the carrier measured)
FIoffset Frequency offset of the interferer (between the center frequency of the interferer and the closest
edge of the carrier measured)
Floor(x) Rounding downwards; floor(x) is the greatest integer such that floor(x) ≤ x
FOOB The boundary between the NR out of band emission and spurious emission domains
FREF RF reference frequency
FREF-Offs Offset used for calculating FREF
FUL_low The lowest frequency of the uplink operating band
FUL_high The highest frequency of the uplink operating band
FUL_Meas The sub-carrier frequency for which the equalizer coefficient is evaluated
GBChannel Minimum guard band defined in sub-clause 5.3.3
LCRB Transmission bandwidth which represents the length of a contiguous resource block allocation
expressed in units of resources blocks
LCRB,Max Maximum number of RB for a given Channel bandwidth and sub-carrier spacing
Max() The largest of given numbers
Min() The smallest of given numbers
MPRf,c Maximum output power reduction for carrier f of serving cell c
MPRnarrow Maximum output power reduction due to narrow PRB allocation
MPRWT Maximum power reduction due to modulation orders, transmit bandwidth configurations,
waveform types
nPRB Physical resource block number
NRACLR NR ACLR
NRB Transmission bandwidth configuration, expressed in units of resource blocks
NRB,low Transmission bandwidth configurations according to Table 5.3.2-1 for the lowest assigned
component carrier in clause 5.3A.1
NRB,high Transmission bandwidth configurations according to Table 5.3.2-1 for the highest assigned
component carrier in clause 5.3A.1
NREF NR Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (NR-ARFCN)
NREF-Offs Offset used for calculating NREF
PCMAX The configured maximum UE output power
PCMAX, f, c The configured maximum UE output power for carrier f of serving cell c
Pint The intermediate power point as defined in table 6.3.4.2-2
PInterferer Modulated mean power of the interferer
Pmax The maximum UE output power as specified in sub-clause 6.2.1
Pmin The minimum UE output power as specified in sub-clause 6.3.1
P-MPRf,c The Power Management UE Maximum Power Reduction for carrier f of serving cell c
PPowerClass Nominal UE power class (i.e., no tolerance) as specified in sub-clause 6.2.1
PRB The transmitted power per allocated RB, measured in dBm
PTMAX,f,c The measured total radiated power for carrier f of serving cell c
PUMAX The measured configured maximum UE output power
Pw Power of a wanted DL signal
RBstart Indicates the lowest RB index of transmitted resource blocks
SCSlow SCS for the lowest assigned component carrier in clause 5.3A.1
SCShigh SCS for the highest assigned component carrier in clause 5.3A.1
SSREF SS block reference frequency position
T(∆P) The tolerance T(∆P) for applicable values of ∆P (values in dB)
TRPmax The maximum TRP for the UE power class as specified in sub-clause 6.2.1
ETSI
3.3 Abbreviations
For the purposes of the present document, the abbreviations given in 3GPP TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. An
abbreviation defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same abbreviation, if any, in
3GPP TR 21.905 [1].
ACLR Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio

ACS Adjacent Channel Selectivity
A-MPR Additional Maximum Power Reduction
AoA Angle of Arrival
BCS Bandwidth Combination Set
BPSK Binary Phase-Shift Keying
BS Base Station
BW Bandwidth
BWP Bandwidth Part
CA Carrier aggregation
CABW Cumulative Aggregated Channel Bandwidth
CA_nX-nY Inter-band CA of component carrier(s) in one sub-block within Band X and component carrier(s)
in one sub-block within Band Y where X and Y are the applicable NR operating band
CC Component carrier
CDF Cumulative Distribution Function
CP-OFDM Cyclic Prefix-OFDM
CW Continuous Wave
DFT-s-OFDM Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM
DM-RS Demodulation Reference Signal
DTX Discontinuous Transmission
EIRP Effective Isotropic Radiated Power
EIS Effective Isotropic Sensitivity
EVM Error Vector Magnitude
FR Frequency Range
FWA Fixed Wireless Access
GSCN Global Synchronization Channel Number
IBB In-band Blocking
IDFT Inverse Discrete Fourier Transformation
ITU-R Radiocommunication Sector of the International Telecommunication Union
MBW Measurement bandwidth defined for the protected band
MPR Allowed maximum power reduction
NR New Radio
NR-ARFCN NR Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
OCNG OFDMA Channel Noise Generator
OOB Out-of-band
OTA Over The Air
P-MPR Power Management Maximum Power Reduction
PRB Physical Resource Block
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
RF Radio Frequency
REFSENS Reference Sensitivity
RIB Radiated Interface Boundary
RMS Root Mean Square (value)
RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
Rx Receiver
SCS Subcarrier spacing
SEM Spectrum Emission Mask
SRS Sounding Reference Symbol
SS Synchronization Symbol
TPC Transimission Power Control
TRP Total Radiated Power
Tx Transmitter
UE User Equipment
UL MIMO Uplink Multiple Antenna transmission
ETSI
4 General
4.1 Relationship between minimum requirements and test

requirements
The present document is a Single-RAT specification for NR UE, covering RF characteristics and minimum
performance requirements. Conformance to the present specification is demonstrated by fulfilling the test requirements
specified in the conformance specification 3GPP TS 38.521-2 [5].
The Minimum Requirements given in this specification make no allowance for measurement uncertainty. The test
specification TS 38.521-2 [5] defines test tolerances. These test tolerances are individually calculated for each test. The
test tolerances are used to relax the minimum requirements in this specification to create test requirements. For some
requirements, including regulatory requirements, the test tolerance is set to zero.
The measurement results returned by the test system are compared - without any modification - against the test
requirements as defined in 3GPP TS 38.521-2 [5].
4.2 Applicability of minimum requirements

a) In this specification the Minimum Requirements are specified as general requirements and additional
requirements. Where the Requirement is specified as a general requirement, the requirement is mandated to be
met in all scenarios
b) For specific scenarios for which an additional requirement is specified, in addition to meeting the general
requirement, the UE is mandated to meet the additional requirements.
c) The spurious emissions power requirements are for the long-term average of the power. For the purpose of
reducing measurement uncertainty it is acceptable to average the measured power over a period of time
sufficient to reduce the uncertainty due to the statistical nature of the signal
d) All the requirements for intra-band contiguous and non-contiguous CA apply under the assumption of the same
slot format indicated by TDD-UL-DL-ConfigurationCommon and TDD-UL-DL-ConfigurationDedicated in the
PCell and SCells for NR SA.
A terminal which supports CA or DC configurations, which include FR2 intra-band CA combinations with multiple
subblocks, where at least one of the subblocks consists of a contiguous CA combination, is not required to support all
possible fallback combinations but can directly fall back to a single FR2 carrier. Deactivating carriers within the CA or
DC combination is still possible.
4.3 Specification suffix information

Unless stated otherwise the following suffixes are used for indicating at 2nd level clause, shown in Table 4.3-1.
Table 4.3-1: Definition of suffixes

Clause suffix Variant
None Single Carrier
A Carrier Aggregation (CA)
B Dual-Connectivity (DC)
C Supplement Uplink (SUL)
D UL MIMO
NOTE: Suffix D in this specification represents either polarized UL MIMO
or spatial UL MIMO. RF requirements are same. If UE supports
both kinds of UL MIMO, then RF requirements only need to be
verified under either polarized or spatial UL MIMO.
ETSI
5 Operating bands and channel arrangement
5.1 General
The channel arrangements presented in this clause are based on the operating bands and channel bandwidths defined in
the present release of specifications.
NOTE: Other operating bands and channel bandwidths may be considered in future releases.
Requirements throughout the RF specifications are in many cases defined separately for different frequency ranges
(FR). The frequency ranges in which NR can operate according to this version of the specification are identified as
described in Table 5.1-1.
Table 5.1-1: Definition of frequency ranges

Frequency range Corresponding frequency range
designation
FR1 410 MHz – 7125 MHz
FR2 24250 MHz – 52600 MHz
The present specification covers FR2 operating bands.
5.2 Operating bands

NR is designed to operate in the FR2 operating bands defined in Table 5.2-1.
Table 5.2-1: NR operating bands in FR2

Operating Uplink (UL) operating band Downlink (DL) operating band Duplex
Band BS receive BS transmit Mode
UE transmit UE receive
FUL_low – FUL_high FDL_low – FDL_high
n257 26500 MHz – 29500 MHz 26500 MHz – 29500 MHz TDD
5.2A Operating bands for CA

5.2A.1 Intra-band CA
NR intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation is designed to operate in the operating bands defined in Table 5.2A.1-1,
where all operating bands are within FR2.
Table 5.2A.1-1: Intra-band contiguous CA operating bands in FR2

NR Band
NR CA Band
(Table 5.2-1)
CA_n257 n257
CA_n258 n258
CA_n259 n259
CA_n260 n260
CA_n261 n261
ETSI
5.2A.2 Void
5.2D Operating bands for UL MIMO

NR UL MIMO is designed to operate in the operating bands defined in Table 5.2D-1.
Table 5.2D-1: NR UL MIMO operating bands

UL MIMO operating band
(Table 5.2-1)
n257
n258
n259
n260
n261
5.3 UE Channel bandwidth

5.3.1 General
The UE channel bandwidth supports a single NR RF carrier in the uplink or downlink at the UE. From a BS
perspective, different UE channel bandwidths may be supported within the same spectrum for transmitting to and
receiving from UEs connected to the BS. Transmission of multiple carriers to the same UE (CA) or multiple carriers to
different UEs within the BS channel bandwidth can be supported.
From a UE perspective, the UE is configured with one or more BWP / carriers, each with its own UE channel
bandwidth. The UE does not need to be aware of the BS channel bandwidth or how the BS allocates bandwidth to
different UEs.
The placement of the UE channel bandwidth for each UE carrier is flexible but can only be completely within the BS
channel bandwidth.
The relationship between the channel bandwidth, the guardband and the transmission bandwidth configuration is shown
in Figure 5.3.1-1.
Figure 5.3.1-1: Definition of channel bandwidth and transmission bandwidth configuration for one NR
channel
ETSI
5.3.2 Maximum transmission bandwidth configuration

The maximum transmission bandwidth configuration NRB for each UE channel bandwidth and subcarrier spacing is
specified in Table 5.3.2-1
Table 5.3.2-1: Maximum transmission bandwidth configuration NRB
SCS (kHz) 50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz

NRB NRB NRB NRB
60 66 132 264 N.A
120 32 66 132 264
5.3.3 Minimum guardband and transmission bandwidth configuration

The minimum guardband for each UE channel bandwidth and SCS is specified in Table 5.3.3-1
Table 5.3.3-1: Minimum guardband for each UE channel bandwidth and SCS (kHz)
SCS (kHz) 50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz

60 1210 2450 4930 N. A
120 1900 2420 4900 9860
NOTE: The minimum guardbands have been calculated using the following equation: (BWChannel x 1000 (kHz) -
NRB x SCS x 12) / 2 - SCS/2, where NRB are from Table 5.3.2-1.
The minimum guardband of receiving BS SCS 240 kHz SS/PBCH block for each UE channel bandwidth is specified in
table 5.3.3-2 for FR2.
Table: 5.3.3-2: Minimum guardband (kHz) of SCS 240 kHz SS/PBCH block
SCS (kHz) 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz

240 3800 7720 15560
NOTE: The minimum guardband in Table 5.3.3-2 is applicable only when the SCS 240 kHz SS/PBCH block is
received adjacent to the edge of the UE channel bandwidth within which the SS/PBCH block is located.
Figure 5.3.3-1: Void
The number of RBs configured in any channel bandwidth shall ensure that the minimum guardband specified in this
clause is met.
ETSI
Figure 5.3.3-2 UE PRB utilization
In the case that multiple numerologies are multiplexed in the same symbol due to BS transmission of SSB, the
minimum guardband on each side of the carrier is the guardband applied at the configured channel bandwidth for the
numerology that is transmitted immediately adjacent to the guard band.
If multiple numerologies are multiplexed in the same symbol and the UE channel bandwidth is > 200 MHz, the
minimum guardband applied adjacent to 60 kHz SCS shall be the same as the minimum guardband defined for 120 kHz
SCS for the same UE channel bandwidth.
Figure 5.3.3-3 Guard band definition when transmitting multiple numerologies
Note: Figure 5.3.3-3 is not intended to imply the size of any guard between the two numerologies. Inter-
numerology guard band within the carrier is implementation dependent.
5.3.4 RB alignment
For each numerology, its common resource blocks are specified in Clause 4.4.4.3 in [9], and the starting point of its
transmission bandwidth configuration on the common resource block grid for a given channel bandwidth is indicated by
an offset to "Reference point A" in the unit of the numerology. The UE transmission bandwidth configuration is
indicated by the higher layer parameter carrierBandwidth [13] and will fulfil the minimum UE guardband requirement
specified in Clause 5.3.3.
5.3.5 Channel bandwidth per operating band

The requirements in this specification apply to the combination of channel bandwidths, SCS and operating bands shown
in Table 5.3.5-1. The transmission bandwidth configuration in Table 5.3.2-1 shall be supported for each of the specified
channel bandwidths. The channel bandwidths are specified for both the Tx and Rx path.
ETSI
Table 5.3.5-1: Channel bandwidths for each NR band

Operating band / SCS / UE channel bandwidth
Operating SCS 50 100 200 4001
band kHz MHz MHz MHz MHz
60 Yes Yes Yes
n257
120 Yes Yes Yes Yes
60 Yes Yes Yes
n258
120 Yes Yes Yes Yes
60 Yes Yes Yes
n259
120 Yes Yes Yes Yes
60 Yes Yes Yes
n260
120 Yes Yes Yes Yes
60 Yes Yes Yes
n261
120 Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE 1: This UE channel bandwidth is optional in this
release of the specification.
5.3A UE channel bandwidth for CA

5.3A.1 General
5.3A.2 Minimum guardband and transmission bandwidth configuration for

CA
For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, Aggregated Channel Bandwidth and Guard Bands are defined as
follows, see Figure 5.3A.2-1.
Aggregated Channel Bandwidth, BWchannel_CA (MHz)
Upper Edge
Lower Edge
Lowest Carrier Highest Carrier

Transmission Bandwidth Transmission Bandwidth
Configuration (RB) Configuration (RB)
Resource block
Foffset, low Foffset, high
Fedge, low FC, low FC, high Fedge, high
Figure 5.3A.2-1: Definition of Aggregated Channel Bandwidth for intra-band carrier aggregation
The aggregated channel bandwidth, BWChannel_CA, is defined as
BWChannel_CA = Fedge,high - Fedge,low (MHz).
The lower bandwidth edge Fedge, low and the upper bandwidth edge Fedge,high of the aggregated channel bandwidth are used
as frequency reference points for transmitter and receiver requirements and are defined by
Fedge,low = FC,low - Foffset,low
ETSI
Fedge,high = FC,high + Foffset,high
The lower and upper frequency offsets depend on the transmission bandwidth configurations of the lowest and highest
assigned edge component carrier and are defined as
Foffset,low = (NRB,low*12 + 1)*SCSlow/2 + BWGB (MHz)
Foffset,high = (NRB,high*12 - 1)*SCShigh/2 + BWGB (MHz)
BWGB = max(BWGB,Channel(k))
BWGB,Channel(k) is the minimum guard band defined in sub-clause 5.3.3 of carrier k, while NRB,low and NRB,high are the
transmission bandwidth configurations according to Table 5.3.2-1 for the lowest and highest assigned component
carrier, SCSlow and SCShigh are the sub-carrier spacing for the lowest and highest assigned component carrier
respectively.
For intra-band non-contiguous carrier aggregation Sub-block Bandwidth and Sub-block edges are defined as follows, see
Figure 5.3A.2-2.
Sub-block Bandwidth, BWChannel,block n (MHz) Sub-block Bandwidth, BWChannel,block n+1 (MHz)
Lower Sub-block Edge
Lower Sub-block Edge

Transmission Transmission Transmission Transmission
Upper Sub-block Edge
Upper Sub-block Edge

Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth
Configuration of Configuration of Configuration of Configuration of
the lowest carrier in the highest carrier the lowest carrier in the highest carrier
a sub-block [RB] in a sub-block a sub-block [RB] in a sub-block
Resource block
Resource block
...
Foffset,low Foffset,high Foffset,low Foffset,high
Fedge,block n, low FC,block n,low FC,block n,high Fedge,block n,high FC,block n+1,low FC,block n+1,high
Fedge,block n+1, Fedge,block n+1,high
low
Sub block n Sub block
Figure 5.3A.2-2: Definition of sub-block bandwidth for intra-band non-contiguous spectrum
The lower sub-block edge of the Sub-block Bandwidth (BWChannel,block) is defined as
Fedge,block, low = FC,block,low - Foffset, low.
The upper sub-block edge of the Sub-block Bandwidth is defined as
Fedge,block,high = FC,block,high + Foffset, high.
The Sub-block Bandwidth, BWChannel,block, is defined as follows:
BWChannel,block = Fedge,block,high - Fedge,block,low (MHz)
The lower and upper frequency offsets Foffset,block,low and Foffset,block,high depend on the transmission bandwidth
configurations of the lowest and highest assigned edge component carriers within a sub-block and are defined as
Foffset,block,low = (NRB,low*12 + 1)*SCSlow/2 + BWGB (MHz)
Foffset,block,high = (NRB,high*12 - 1)*SCShigh/2 + BWGB (MHz)
BWGB = max(BWGB,Channel(k))
where NRB,low and NRB,high are the transmission bandwidth configurations according to Table 5.3.2-1 for the lowest and
highest assigned component carrier within a sub-block, respectively. SCSlow and SCShigh are the sub-carrier spacing for
the lowest and highest assigned component carrier within a sub-block, respectively. BWGB,Channel(k) is the minimum
guard band defined in sub-clause 5.3.3 of carrier k within a sub-block.
The sub-block gap size between two consecutive sub-blocks Wgap is defined as
ETSI
Wgap = Fedge,block n+1,low - Fedge,block n,high (MHz)
5.3A.3 RB alignment with different numerologies for CA
5.3A.4 UE channel bandwidth per operating band for CA

For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, a carrier aggregation configuration is a single operating band supporting
a carrier aggregation bandwidth class with associated bandwidth combination sets specified in clause 5.5A.1. For each
carrier aggregation configuration, requirements are specified for all aggregated channel bandwidths contained in a
bandwidth combination set, UE can indicate support of several bandwidth combination sets per carrier aggregation
configuration. The requirements are applicable only when Uplink CCs are configured within the frequency range
between lower edge of lowest downlink component carrier and upper edge of highest downlink component carrier.
For intra-band non-contiguous downlink carrier aggregation, a carrier aggregation configuration is a single operating
band supporting two or more sub-blocks, each supporting a carrier aggregation bandwidth class. The requirements are
applicable only when Uplink CCs are configured within the frequency range between lower edge of lowest downlink
component carrier and upper edge of highest downlink component carrier.
Frequency separation class (Fs) specified in Table 5.3A.4-2 indicates the maximum frequency span between lower edge
of lowest component carrier and upper edge of highest component carrier that UE can support per band in downlink or
uplink (DL Fs or UL Fs) respectively in non-contiguous intra-band operation within the bidirectional spectrum.
The DL-only frequency spectrum is the width of UE frequency spectrum available to network to configure DL CCs
only, and it extends on one-side of the bidirectional spectrum in contiguous manner with no frequency gap between the
two. Frequency separation class for DL-only spectrum (Fsd) specified in Table 5.3A.4-3 and is declared per band. The
frequency separation class for DL-only spectrum (Fsd) can be equal but not larger than the frequency separation (DL
Fs). The combined downlink spectrum (DL Fs + Fsd) cannot exceed 2400 MHz. A UE may configure DL-only
spectrum only if the combined downlink spectrum (DL Fs + Fsd) exceeds 1400 MHz.
For inter-band carrier aggregation, a carrier aggregation configuration is a combination of operating bands, each
supporting a carrier aggregation bandwidth class.
Table 5.3A.4-1: CA bandwidth classes
NR CA bandwidth Aggregated channel bandwidth Number of contiguous Fallback group

class CC
A BW Channel ≤ 400 MHz 1 1,2,3,4
B 400 MHz < BW Channel_CA ≤ 800 MHz 2
1
C 800 MHz < BW Channel_CA ≤ 1200 MHz 3
D 200 MHz < BW Channel_CA ≤ 400 MHz 2
E 400 MHz < BW Channel_CA ≤ 600 MHz 3 2
F 600 MHz < BW Channel_CA ≤ 800 MHz 4
G 100 MHz < BW Channel_CA ≤ 200 MHz 2
H 200 MHz < BW Channel_CA ≤ 300 MHz 3
I 300 MHz < BW Channel_CA ≤ 400 MHz 4
J 400 MHz < BW Channel_CA ≤ 500 MHz 5 3
K 500 MHz < BW Channel_CA ≤ 600 MHz 6
L 600 MHz < BW Channel_CA ≤ 700 MHz 7
M 700 MHz < BW Channel_CA ≤ 800 MHz 8
O 100 MHz ≤ BW Channel_CA ≤ 200 MHz 2
P 150 MHz ≤ BW Channel_CA ≤ 300 MHz 3 4
Q 200 MHz ≤ BW Channel_CA ≤ 400 MHz 4
NOTE 1: Maximum supported component carrier bandwidths for fallback groups 1, 2, 3 and 4 are 400 MHz, 200
MHz, 100 MHz and 100 MHz respectively except for CA bandwidth class A.
NOTE 2: It is mandatory for a UE to be able to fallback to lower order CA bandwidth class configuration within a
fallback group. It is not mandatory for a UE to be able to fallback to lower order CA bandwidth class
configuration that belong to a different fallback group.
ETSI
Table 5.3A.4-2: Frequency separation classes for non-contiguous intra-band operation

Frequency separation class Max. allowed frequency
separation (Fs)
I 800 MHz
II 1200 MHz
III 1400 MHz
IV 1000 MHz
V 1600 MHz
VI 1800 MHz
VII 2000 MHz
VIII 2200 MHz
IX 2400 MHz
NOTE 1: Fs values larger than 1400 MHz apply only to
downlink frequency separation.
Table 5.3A.4-3: Frequency separation classes for DL-only spectrum
Frequency separation class Max. allowed frequency

separation (Fsd)
I 200 MHz
II 400 MHz
III 600 MHz
IV 800 MHz
V 1000 MHz
VI 1200 MHz
5.3D Channel bandwidth for UL MIMO

The requirements specified in clause 5.3 are applicable to UE supporting UL MIMO.
5.4 Channel arrangement

5.4.1 Channel spacing
5.4.1.1 Channel spacing for adjacent NR carriers

The spacing between carriers will depend on the deployment scenario, the size of the frequency block available and the
channel bandwidths. The nominal channel spacing between two adjacent NR carriers is defined as following:
For NR operating bands with 60 kHz channel raster,
Nominal Channel spacing = (BWChannel(1) + BWChannel(2))/2 + {-20 kHz, 0 kHz, 20 kHz} for ∆FRaster equals to 60
kHz
Nominal Channel spacing = (BWChannel(1) + BWChannel(2))/2 + {-40 kHz, 0 kHz, 40 kHz} for ∆FRaster equals to 120
kHz
where BWChannel(1) and BWChannel(2) are the channel bandwidths of the two respective NR carriers. The channel spacing
can be adjusted depending on the channel raster to optimize performance in a particular deployment scenario.
5.4.2 Channel raster
5.4.2.1 NR-ARFCN and channel raster

The global frequency raster defines a set of RF reference frequencies FREF. The RF reference frequency is used in
signalling to identify the position of RF channels, SS blocks and other elements.
ETSI
The global frequency raster is defined for all frequencies from 0 to 100 GHz. The granularity of the global frequency
raster is ΔFGlobal.
RF reference frequency is designated by an NR Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (NR-ARFCN) in the range
[2016667...3279165] on the global frequency raster. The relation between the NR-ARFCN and the RF reference
frequency FREF in MHz is given by the following equation, where FREF-Offs and NRef-Offs are given in table 5.4.2.1-1 and
NREF is the NR-ARFCN
FREF = FREF-Offs + ΔFGlobal (NREF – NREF-Offs)
Table 5.4.2.1-1: NR-ARFCN parameters for the global frequency raster

Frequency range (MHz) ΔFGlobal (kHz) FREF-Offs [MHz] NREF-Offs Range of NREF
24250 – 100000 60 24250.08 2016667 2016667 – 3279165
The channel raster defines a subset of RF reference frequencies that can be used to identify the RF channel position in
the uplink and downlink. The RF reference frequency for an RF channel maps to a resource element on the carrier. For
each operating band, a subset of frequencies from the global frequency raster are applicable for that band and forms a
channel raster with a granularity ΔFRaster, which may be equal to or larger than ΔFGlobal.
The mapping between the channel raster and corresponding resource element is given in Clause 5.4.2.2. The applicable
entries for each operating band are defined in clause 5.4.2.3
5.4.2.2 Channel raster to resource element mapping

The mapping between the RF reference frequency on channel raster and the corresponding resource element is given in
Table 5.4.2.2-1 and can be used to identify the RF channel position. The mapping depends on the total number of RBs
that are allocated in the channel and applies to both UL and DL. The mapping must apply to at least one numerology
supported by the UE.
Table 5.4.2.2-1: Channel raster to resource element mapping
NRB mod 2 = 0 NRB mod 2 = 1

Resource element index k 0 6
Physical resource block number nPRB
 N RB   N RB 
n PRB =   n PRB =  
 2   2 
k, nRB , NRB are as defined in TS 38.211 [9].
5.4.2.3 Channel raster entries for each operating band

The RF channel positions on the channel raster in each NR operating band are given through the applicable NR-
ARFCN in Table 5.4.2.3-1, using the channel raster to resource element mapping in clause 5.4.2.2.
- For NR operating bands with 60 kHz channel raster above 24 GHz, ΔFRaster = I ×ΔFGlobal , where I ϵ {1,2}. Every
Ith NR-ARFCN within the operating band are applicable for the channel raster within the operating band and the
step size for the channel raster in table 5.4.2.3-1 is given as <I>.
- In frequency bands with two ΔFRaster, the higher ΔFRaster applies to channels using only the SCS that equals the
higher ΔFRaster and the SSB SCS that is equal to or larger than the higher ΔFRaster.
ETSI
Table 5.4.2.3-1: Applicable NR-ARFCN per operating band

Operating ΔFRaster Uplink and Downlink
Band (kHz) Range of NREF
(First – <Step size> – Last)
n257 60 2054166 – <1> – 2104165
120 2054167 – <2> – 2104165
n258 60 2016667 – <1> – 2070832
120 2016667 – <2> – 2070831
n259 60 2270832 – <1> – 2337499
120 2270832– <2> – 2337499
n260 60 2229166 – <1> – 2279165
120 2229167 – <2> – 2279165
n261 60 2070833 – <1> – 2084999
120 2070833 – <2> – 2084999
5.4.3 Synchronization raster
5.4.3.1 Synchronization raster and numbering

The synchronization raster indicates the frequency positions of the synchronization block that can be used by the UE for
system acquisition when explicit signalling of the synchronization block position is not present.
A global synchronization raster is defined for all frequencies. The frequency position of the SS block is defined as
SSREF with corresponding number GSCN. The parameters defining the SSREF and GSCN for all the frequency ranges are
in Table 5.4.3.1-1.
The resource element corresponding to the SS block reference frequency SSREF is given in clause 5.4.3.2. The
synchronization raster and the subcarrier spacing of the synchronization block is defined separately for each band.
Table 5.4.3.1-1: GSCN parameters for the global frequency raster

Frequency range SS block frequency position SSREF GSCN Range of GSCN
24250.08 MHz + N * 17.28 MHz,
24250 – 100000 MHz 22256 + N 22256 – 26639
N = 0:4383
5.4.3.2 Synchronization raster to synchronization block resource element mapping

The mapping between the synchronization raster and the corresponding resource element of the SS block is given in
Table 5.4.3.2-1.
Table 5.4.3.2-1: Synchronization raster to SS block resource element mapping
Resource element index k 120
k is the subcarrier number of SS/PBCH block defined in TS 38.211 clause 7.4.3.1 [9].
5.4.3.3 Synchronization raster entries for each operating band

The synchronization raster for each band is give in Table 5.4.3.3-1. The distance between applicable GSCN entries is
given by the <Step size> indicated in Table 5.4.3.3-1.
ETSI
Table 5.4.3.3-1: Applicable SS raster entries per operating band

Table 5.4.3.3-1: Table 5.4.3.3-1: Applicable Table 5.4.3.3-1: Table 5.4.3.3-1: Applicable
Applicable SS r SS r Applicable SS r SS r
Table 5.4.3.3-1: Table 5.4.3.3-1: Applicable Table 5.4.3.3-1: Applicable Table 5.4.3.3-1: Applicable
Applicable SS r SS r SS r SS r
Table 5.4.3.3-1: Applicable Table 5.4.3.3-1: Applicable Table 5.4.3.3-1: Applicable
SS r SS r SS r
SS r SS r SS r
SS r SS r SS r
SS r SS r SS r
SS r SS r SS r
Table 5.4.3.3-1: Applicable SS r
5.4A Channel arrangement for CA

5.4A.1 Channel spacing for CA
For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation with two or more component carriers, the nominal channel spacing
between two adjacent NR component carriers is defined as the following unless stated otherwise:
For NR operating bands with 60kHz channel raster:
 BW Channel (1) + BW Channel ( 2 ) − 2 GB Channel (1) − GB Channel ( 2 ) 

Nominal channel spacing =   0 .06 * 2
n
[MHz]
 0 .06 * 2 n +1 
 
with
n = µ0 – 2
where BWChannel(1) and BWChannel(2) are the channel bandwidths of the two respective NR component carriers according to
Table 5.3.2-1 with values in MHz, μo is the largest μ value among the subcarrier spacing configurations supported in the
operating band for both of the channel bandwidths according to Table 5.3.5-1, and GBChannel(i) is the minimum guard
band for channel bandwidth i according to Table 5.3.3-1 for the said μ value, with μ as defined in TS 38.211 [9].
The channel spacing for intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation can be adjusted to any multiple of sub-carrier spacing
less than the nominal channel spacing to optimize performance in a particular deployment scenario.
For intra-band non-contiguous carrier aggregation, the channel spacing between two NR component carriers in different
sub-blocks shall be larger than the nominal channel spacing defined in this clause.
ETSI
5.5 Configurations
5.5A Configurations for CA

5.5A.1 Configurations for intra-band contiguous CA
Table 5.5A.1-1: NR CA configurations, bandwidth combination sets, and fallback group defined for intra-band contiguous CA
NR CA configuration / Bandwidth combination set / Fallback group

Maximum
NR CA Uplink CA BWChannel BWChannel BWChannel BWChannel BWChannel BWChannel BWChannel BWChannel Fallback
aggregated BCS
configuration configurations (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz) group
BW (MHz)
50, 100,
CA_n257B CA_n257B 400 800 0 1
200, 400
50, 100,
CA_n257C CA_n257B 400 400 1200 0 1
200, 400
50, 100,
CA_n257D CA_n257D 200 400 0
200
50, 100,
CA_n257E CA_n257E 200 200 600 0 2
200
50, 100,
CA_n257F CA_n257F 200 200 200 800 0
200
CA_n257G CA_n257G 50, 100 100 200 0
CA_n257G
CA_n257H 50, 100 100 100 300 0
CA_n257H
CA_n257G
CA_n257I CA_n257H 50, 100 100 100 100 400 0
CA_n257I
CA_n257G
CA_n257H 3
CA_n257J 50, 100 100 100 100 100 500 0
CA_n257I
CA_n257J
CA_n257G
CA_n257H
CA_n257K CA_n257I 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 0
CA_n257J
CA_n257K
ETSI

Maximum
aggregated BCS
BW (MHz)
CA_n257G
CA_n257H
CA_n257I
CA_n257L 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 700 0
CA_n257J
CA_n257K
CA_n257L
CA_n257G
CA_n257H
CA_n257I
CA_n257M CA_n257J 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 0
CA_n257K
CA_n257L
CA_n257M
CA_n258A 50, 100,
CA_n258B 400 800 0
CA_n258B 200, 400
CA_n258A 1
50, 100,
CA_n258C CA_n258B 400 400 1200 0
200, 400
CA_n258C
CA_n258A 50, 100,
CA_n258D 200 400 0
CA_n258D 200
CA_n258A
50, 100,
CA_n258E CA_n258D 200 200 600 0
200
CA_n258E 2
CA_n258A
CA_n258D 50, 100,
CA_n258F 200 200 200 800 0
CA_n258E 200
CA_n258F
CA_n258A
CA_n258G 50, 100 100 200 0
CA_n258G
CA_n258A
CA_n258H CA_n258G 50, 100 100 100 300 0
CA_n258H
CA_n258A
CA_n258G
CA_n258I 50, 100 100 100 100 400 0 3
CA_n258H
CA_n258I
CA_n258A
CA_n258G
CA_n258J CA_n258H 50, 100 100 100 100 100 500 0
CA_n258I
CA_n258J
ETSI

Maximum
aggregated BCS
BW (MHz)
CA_n258A
CA_n258G
CA_n258H
CA_n258K 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 0
CA_n258I
CA_n258J
CA_n258K
CA_n258A
CA_n258G
CA_n258H
CA_n258L CA_n258I 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 700 0
CA_n258J
CA_n258K
CA_n258L
CA_n258A
CA_n258G
CA_n258H
CA_n258I
CA_n258M 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 0
CA_n258J
CA_n258K
CA_n258L
CA_n258M
ETSI

Maximum
aggregated BCS
BW (MHz)
50, 100,
CA_n259B CA_n259B 400 800 0
200, 400
50, 100,
CA_n259C CA_n259B 400 400 1200 0
200, 400
CA_n259G CA_n259G 50, 100 100 200 0
CA_n259G
CA_n259H 50, 100 100 100 300 0
CA_n259H
CA_n259G
CA_n259I CA_n259H 50, 100 100 100 100 400 0
CA_n259I
CA_n259G
CA_n259H
CA_n259J 50, 100 100 100 100 100 500 0
CA_n259I
CA_n259J
CA_n259G
CA_n259H 3
CA_n259K CA_n259I 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 0
CA_n259J
CA_n259K
CA_n259G
CA_n259H
CA_n259I
CA_n259L 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 700 0
CA_n259J
CA_n259K
CA_n259L
CA_n259G
CA_n259H
CA_n259I
CA_n259M CA_n259J 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 0
CA_n259K
CA_n259L
CA_n259M
50, 100,
CA_n260B CA_n260B 400 800 0
200, 400
1
50, 100,
CA_n260C CA_n260B 400 400 1200 0
200, 400
50, 100,
CA_n260D CA_n260D 200 400 0
200
50, 100,
CA_n260E CA_n260E 200 200 600 0 2
200
50, 100,
CA_n260F CA_n260F 200 200 200 800 0
200
ETSI

Maximum
aggregated BCS
BW (MHz)
CA_n260G CA_n260G 50, 100 100 200 0
CA_n260G
CA_n260H 50, 100 100 100 300 0
CA_n260H
CA_n260G
CA_n260I CA_n260H 50, 100 100 100 100 400 0
CA_n260I
CA_n260G
CA_n260H
CA_n260J 50, 100 100 100 100 100 500 0
CA_n260I
CA_n260J
CA_n260G 3
CA_n260H
CA_n260K 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 0
CA_n260I
CA_n260K
CA_n260G
CA_n260H
CA_n260L 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 700 0
CA_n260I
CA_n260L
CA_n260G
CA_n260H
CA_n260M 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 0
CA_n260I
CA_n260M
CA_n260O CA_n260O 50, 100 50, 100 200 0
CA_n260P CA_n260P 50, 100 50, 100 50, 100 300 0 4
CA_n260Q CA_n260Q 50, 100 50, 100, 50, 100 50, 100 400 0
50, 100,
CA_n261B CA_n261B 400 800 0
200, 400 1
CA_n261C CA_n261B 50 400 400 8501 0
50, 100,
CA_n261D CA_n261D 200 400 0
200
50, 100,
CA_n261E CA_n261E 200 200 600 0 2
200
50, 100,
CA_n261F CA_n261F 200 200 200 800 0
200
CA_n261G CA_n261G 100 50, 100 200 0
CA_n261G 100 100 50, 100
CA_n261H 300 0
CA_n261H
3
CA_n261G
CA_n261I CA_n261H 50, 100 100 100 100 400 0
CA_n261I
ETSI

Maximum
aggregated BCS
BW (MHz)
CA_n261G
CA_n261J CA_n261H 50, 100 100 100 100 100 500 0
CA_n261ICA_n261J
CA_n261G
CA_n261H
CA_n261K 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 600 0
CA_n261I
CA_n261K
CA_n261G
CA_n261H
CA_n261L 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 700 0
CA_n261I
CA_n261L
CA_n261G
CA_n261H
CA_n261M 50, 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 800 0
CA_n261I
CA_n261M
CA_n261O CA_n261O 50, 100 50, 100 200 0
CA_n261P CA_n261P 50, 100 50, 100 50, 100 300 0 4
CA_n261Q CA_n261Q 50, 100 50, 100, 50, 100 50, 100 400 0
NOTE 1: The maximum bandwidth of band n261 is 850MHz
NOTE 2: For the NR CA configuration with more than two component carries, the bandwidths in a BCS which may introduce combinations more than requested unintentionally should
be listed in a row separately.
5.5A.2 Configurations for intra-band non-contiguous CA

Configurations listed in this clause apply to downlink carrier aggregation only.
NOTE: Sub-blocks belonging to a CA configuration can be in any order. In other words certain CA configuration acronym includes all sub-block arrangements which
have exactly the same sub-block set. As an example, CA_260(3O-2P) denotes CA_260(2O-2P-O), CA_260(P-3O-P) etc. but these are not listed in tables
separately.
Table 5.5A.2-1: NR CA configurations with single CA bandwidth class defined for intra-band non-contiguous CA
NR CA configuration / Bandwidth combination set
Sub Sub Sub Sub

Uplink CA Σ(BWChann
NR Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- - - - -
configurati el,block) BCS
configuration block block block block block block block block block block blo blo blo blo
ons (MHz)
ck ck ck ck
ETSI

CA_n257(2A) - n257A n257A 800 0
CA_n258(2A) - n258A n258A 800 0
CA_n258(3A) - n258A n258A n258A 1200 0
CA_n258(4A) - n258A n258A n258A n258A 1600 0
CA_n258(5A) - n258A n258A n258A n258A n258A 2000 0
CA_n260(2A) - n260A n260A 800 0
CA_n260(3A) - n260A n260A n260A 1200 0
CA_n260(4A) - n260A n260A n260A n260A 1600 0
CA_n260(5A) - n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A 2000 0
CA_n260(6A) - n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A 2400 0
CA_n260(7A) - n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A 2800 0
CA_n260(8A) - n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A 2900 0
CA_n260(9A) - n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A 2950 0
CA_n260(10A) - n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A n260A 2950 0
CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n260(2D) - 800 0
0D 0D
CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n260(2G) CA_n260G 400 0
0G 0G
CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n260(3G) - 600 0
0G 0G 0G
CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n260(4G) - 800 0
0G 0G 0G 0G
CA_n260G CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n260(2H) 600 0
CA_n260H 0H 0H
CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n260(2O) - 400 0
0O 0O
CA_n260(3O) - 600 0
0O 0O 0O
CA_n260(4O) - 800 0
0O 0O 0O 0O
CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n260(2P) - 600 0
0P 0P
CA_n260(3P) - 900 0
0P 0P 0P
CA_n260(4P) - 1200 0
0P 0P 0P 0P
CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n260(2Q) - 800 0
0Q 0Q
CA_n261(2A) - n261A n261A 800 0
ETSI

CA_n261(3A) - n261A n261A n261A 800 0
CA_n261(4A) - n261A n261A n261A n261A 800 0
CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n261(2D) - 800 0
1D 1D
CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n261(2G) CA_n261G 400 0
1G 1G
CA_n261(3G) - 600 0
1G 1G 1G
CA_n261(4G) - 800 0
1G 1G 1G 1G
CA_n261(2H) 600 0
CA_n261H 1H 1H
CA_n261G
CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n261(2I) CA_n261H 800 0
1I 1I
CA_n261I
CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n261(2O) - 400 0
1O 1O
CA_n261(3O) - 600 0
1O 1O 1O
CA_n261(4O) - 800 0
1O 1O 1O 1O
CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n261(5O) - 800 0
1O 1O 1O 1O 1O
CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n261(6O) - 800 0
1O 1O 1O 1O 1O 1O
CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n26 CA_n2
CA_n261(7O) - 800 0
1O 1O 1O 1O 1O 1O 61O
CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n261(2P) - 600 0
1P 1P
CA_n26 CA_n26
CA_n261(2Q) - 800 0
1Q 1Q
NOTE 1: Void
NOTE 2: Void
NOTE 3: Void
NOTE 4: Void
NOTE 5: Channel bandwidth per operating band defined in Table 5.3.5-1
NOTE 6: Unless otherwise stated, BCS0 is referred in each constituent CA configuration
NOTE 7: Σ(BW Channel,block) denotes the maximum total bandwidth from the summation of the sub-block bandwidths and shall be less than the bandwidth of the operating
band.
ETSI
Table 5.5A.2-2: NR CA configurations and bandwidth combination sets for intra-band non-contiguous CA
Σ(BWChann
Uplink CA Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub-
CA configuration Sub-block el,block) BCS
configurations block block block block block block block block block block block
(MHz)
ETSI
CA_n2
CA_n260(A-D) - n260 800 0
60D
CA_n260
CA_n260(2A-D) - CA_n260(2A) 1200 0
D
CA_n260(A-2D) - n260 CA_n260(2D) 1200 0
CA_n260(2A-2D) - CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2D) 1600 0
CA_n2 CA_n260
CA_n260(A-D-O) - n260 1000 0
60D O
CA_n260 CA_n26
CA_n260(2A-D-O) - CA_n260(2A) 1400 0
D 0O
CA_n2
CA_n260(A-D-2O) - n260 CA_n260(2O) 1200 0
60D
CA_n260(2A-D- CA_n260
- CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2O) 1600 0
2O) D
CA_n2
CA_n260(A-G) CA_n260G n260 600 0
60G
CA_n260
CA_n260(2A-G) CA_n260G CA_n260(2A) 1000 0
G
CA_n260(A-2G) CA_n260G n260 CA_n260(2G) 800 0
CA_n260(2A-2G) CA_n260G CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2G) 1200 0
CA_n260(2A-2G- CA_n260
- CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2G) 1400 0
O) O
CA_n260(2A-2G-
- CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2G) CA_n260(2O) 1600 0
2O)
CA_n260(3A-2G) - CA_n260(3A) CA_n260(2G) 1600 0
CA_n260
CA_n260(4A-G) - CA_n260(4A) 1800 0
G
CA_n260(4A-2G) - CA_n260(4A) CA_n260(2G) 2000 0
CA_n260(A-2G-
- n260 CA_n260(2G) CA_n260(2O) 1200 0
2O)
CA_n260(2A-G- - CA_n260
CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2O) 1400 0
2O) G
CA_n26
CA_n260(3A-G) CA_n260G CA_n260(3A) 1400 0
0G
CA_n260(A-2H) - n260 CA_n260(2H) 1000 0
CA_n260
CA_n260(2A-H) - CA_n260(2A) 1100 0
H
CA_n260(2A-2H) - CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2H) 1400 0
CA_n260G CA_n2
CA_n260(A-H) n260 700 0
CA_n260H 60H
ETSI
CA_n2
CA_n260(A-O) - n260 600 0
60O
CA_n2 CA_n260
CA_n260(A-O-P) - n260 900 0
60O P
CA_n2
CA_n260(A-O-2P) - n260 CA_n260(2P) 1200 0
60O
CA_n260 CA_n26
CA_n260(2A-O-P) - CA_n260(2A) 1300 0
O 0P
CA_n260(2A-O- CA_n260
- CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2P) 1600 0
2P) O
CA_n260(2A-2O- CA_n260
- CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2O) 1500 0
P) P
CA_n2 CA_n260
CA_n260(A-O-Q) - n260 1000 0
60O Q
CA_n2
CA_n260(A-O-2Q) - n260 CA_n260(2Q) 1400 0
60O
CA_n260 CA_n26
CA_n260(2A-O-Q) - CA_n260(2A) 1400 0
O 0Q
CA_n260(2A-O- CA_n260
- CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2Q) 1800 0
2Q) O
CA_n260(2A-2O- CA_n260
- CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2O) 1600 0
Q) Q
CA_n260
CA_n260(2A-O) - CA_n260(2A) 1000 0
O
CA_n260(A-2O) - n260 CA_n260(2O) 800 0
CA_n26
CA_n260(A-2O-P) - n260 CA_n260(2O) 1100 0
0P
CA_n260(A-2O-
- n260 CA_n260(2O) CA_n260(2P) 1400 0
2P)
CA_n26
CA_n260(A-2O-Q) - n260 CA_n260(2O) 1200 0
0Q
CA_n260(A-2O-
- n260 CA_n260(2O) CA_n260(2Q) 1600 0
2Q)
CA_n260(2A-2O) - CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2O) 1200 0
CA_n260(2A-2O-
- CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2O) CA_n260(2P) 1800 0
2P)
CA_n260(2A-2O-
- CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2O) CA_n260(2Q) 2000 0
2Q)
CA_n260(2A-3O) - CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(3O) 1400 0
CA_n260(3A-2O) - CA_n260(3A) CA_n260(2O) 1600 0
CA_n260
CA_n260(4A-O) - CA_n260(4A) 1800 0
O
ETSI
CA_n260(
CA_n260(4A-3O) - CA_n260(4A) 2200 0
3O)
CA_n26
CA_n260(5A-O) - CA_n260(5A) 2200 0
0O
CA_n260
CA_n260(6A-O) - CA_n260(6A) 2600 0
O
CA_n26
CA_n260(7A-O) - CA_n260(7A) 2950 0
0O
CA_n2
CA_n260(8A-O) - CA_n260(8A) 2950 0
60O
CA_n260(4A-2O) - CA_n260(4A) CA_n260(2O) 2000 0
CA_n260(4A-2Q) - CA_n260(4A) CA_n260(2Q) 2400 0
CA_n260(3A-3O) - CA_n260(3A) CA_n260(3O) 1800 0
CA_n2 CA_n260
CA_n260(A-G-O) - n260 800 0
60G O
CA_n2
CA_n260(A-G-2O) - n260 CA_n260(2O) 1000 0
60G
CA_n260 CA_n26
CA_n260(2A-G-O) - CA_n260(2A) 1200 0
G 0O
CA_n26
CA_n260(A-2G-O) - n260 CA_n260(2G) 1000 0
0O
CA_n260(A-3O) - n260 CA_n260(3O) 1000 0
CA_n26
CA_n260(3A-O) - CA_n260(3A) 1400 0
0O
CA_n260O CA_n26 CA_n260

CA_n260(3A-O-P) CA_n260(3A) 1700 0
CA_n260P 0O P
CA_n260(A-4O) - n260 CA_n260(4O) 1200 0

CA_n260(2A-4O) - CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(4O) 1600 0
CA_n260(3A-4O) - CA_n260(3A) CA_n260(4O) 2000 0
CA_n260(4A-4O) - CA_n260(4A) CA_n260(4O) 2400 0
CA_n260(5A-4O) - CA_n260(5A) CA_n260(4O) 2800 0
CA_n2
CA_n260(A-P) - n260 700 0
60P
CA_n260(A-3P) - n260 CA_n260(3P) 1300 0
CA_n260(A-4P) - n260 CA_n260(4P) 1600 0
CA_n260P CA_n2 CA_n260

CA_n260(A-P-Q) n260 1100 0
CA_n260Q 60P Q
ETSI
CA_n260
CA_n260(2A-P) - CA_n260(2A) 1100 0
P
CA_n26
CA_n260(3A-P) - CA_n260(3A) 1500 0
0P
CA_n260
CA_n260(4A-P) - CA_n260(4A) 1900 0
P
CA_n26
CA_n260(5A-P) - CA_n260(5A) 2300 0
0P
CA_n260
CA_n260(6A-P) - CA_n260(6A) 2700 0
P
CA_n260(A-2P) - n260 CA_n260(2P) 1000 0
CA_n260(2A-2P) - CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2P) 1400 0
CA_n260(2A-3P) - CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(3P) 1700 0
CA_n260(2A-4P) - CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(4P) 2000 0
CA_n260(3A-2P) - CA_n260(3A) CA_n260(2P) 1800 0
CA_n260(4A-2P) - CA_n260(4A) CA_n260(2P) 2200 0
CA_n260(5A-2P) - CA_n260(5A) CA_n260(2P) 2600 0
CA_n260(5A-2O) - CA_n260(5A) CA_n260(2O) 2400 0
CA_n260(6A-2O) - CA_n260(6A) CA_n260(2O) 2800 0
CA_n260(5A-3O) - CA_n260(5A) CA_n260(3O) 2600 0
CA_n260(6A-3O) - CA_n260(6A) CA_n260(3O) 2950 0
CA_n260(7A-2O) - CA_n260(7A) CA_n260(2O) 2950 0
CA_n260(7A-3O) - CA_n260(7A) CA_n260(3O) 2950 0
CA_n260(6A-2P) - CA_n260(6A) CA_n260(2P) 2950 0
CA_n260(8A-2O) - CA_n260(8A) CA_n260(2O) 25502 0
CA_n2
CA_n260(A-Q) - n260 800 0
60Q
CA_n260(A-2Q) - n260 CA_n260(2Q) 1200 0
CA_n260
CA_n260(2A-Q) - CA_n260(2A) 1200 0
Q
CA_n260(2A-2Q) - CA_n260(2A) CA_n260(2Q) 1600 0
CA_n26
CA_n260(3A-Q) - CA_n260(3A) 1600 0
0Q
CA_n260(3A-2Q) - CA_n260(3A) CA_n260(2Q) 2000 0
CA_n260
CA_n260(4A-Q) - CA_n260(4A) 2000 0
Q
CA_n260
CA_n260(D-2G) - CA_n260(2G) 800 0
D
ETSI
CA_n260
CA_n260(2D-O) - CA_n260(2D) 1000 0
O
CA_n260
CA_n260(D-2O) - CA_n260(2O) 800 0
D
CA_n2
CA_n260(A-I) CA_n260I n260 800 0
60I
CA_n260D CA_n260 CA_n2

CA_n260(D-G) 600 0
CA_n260G D 60G

CA_n260(D-H) 700 0
CA_n260H D 60H

CA_n260(D-I) 800 0
CA_n260I D 60I

CA_n260(D-O) 600 0
CA_n260O D 60O

CA_n260(D-P) 700 0
CA_n260P D 60P

CA_n260(D-Q) 800 0
CA_n260Q D 60Q
CA_n260E CA_n260 CA_n2

CA_n260(E-O) 800 0
CA_n260O O 60E
CA_n260E CA_n2
CA_n260(E-P) CA_n260E 8001 0
CA_n260P 60P
CA_n260E CA_n2
CA_n260(E-Q) CA_n260E 1000 0
CA_n260Q 60Q

CA_n260(G-H) 500 0
CA_n260H G 60H

CA_n260(G-I) 600 0
CA_n260I G 60I
CA_n260 CA_n2
CA_n260(G-O) - 400 0
G 60O
CA_n260
CA_n260(G-2O) - CA_n260(2O) 600 0
G
ETSI
CA_n260
CA_n260(2G-O) - CA_n260(2G) 600 0
O
CA_n260(2G-2O) - CA_n260(2G) CA_n260(2O) 800 0
CA_n260
CA_n260(G-3O) - CA_n260(3O) 800 0
G
CA_n26
CA_n260(3G-O) - CA_n260(3G) 800 0
0O
CA_n260(2G-3O) - CA_n260(2G) CA_n260(3O) 1000 0
CA_n260
CA_n260(G-4O) - CA_n260(4O) 1000 0
G
CA_n260(2G-4O) - CA_n260(2G) CA_n260(4O) 1200 0
CA_n260
CA_n260(4G-O) - CA_n260(4G) 1000 0
O
CA_n260 CA_n2
CA_n260(H-O) - 500 0
H 60O
CA_n260
CA_n260(2H-O) - CA_n260(2H) 800 0
O
CA_n260
CA_n260(O-2P) - CA_n260(2P) 800 0
O
CA_n260
CA_n260(O-2Q) - CA_n260(2Q) 1000 0
O
CA_n260 CA_n2
CA_n260(O-P) - 500 0
O 60P
CA_n260(2O-P) - CA_n260(2O) CA_n260P 700 0
CA_n260(2O-2P) - CA_n260(2P) CA_n260(2O) 1000 0
CA_n260 CA_n2
CA_n260(O-Q) - 600 0
O 60Q
CA_n260
CA_n260(2O-Q) - CA_n260(2O) 800 0
Q
CA_n260(2O-2Q) - CA_n260(2O) CA_n260(2Q) 1200 0
CA_n2
CA_n260(P-Q) - CA_n260P 700 0
60Q
CA_n2
CA_n261(A-D) - n261 800 0
61D
CA_n261(A-2D) - n261 CA_n261(2D) 800 0
CA_n2 CA_n261
CA_n261(A-D-H) - n261 800 0
61D H
CA_n2 CA_n261
CA_n261(A-D-O) - n261 800 0
61D O
ETSI
CA_n2
CA_n261(A-D-2O) - n261 CA_n261(2O) 800 0
61D
CA_n2
CA_n261(A-G) CA_n261G n261 600 0
61G
CA_n261(A-G-H) n261 800 0
CA_n261H 61G H
CA_n261G
CA_n2
CA_n261(A-G-I) CA_n261H n261 n261I 800 0
61G
CA_n261I
CA_n2 CA_n261
CA_n261(A-G-O) - n261 800 0
61G O
CA_n2
CA_n261(A-G-2O) - n261 CA_n261(2O) 800 0
61G
CA_n26
CA_n261(A-2G-O) - n261 CA_n261(2G) 800 0
1O
CA_n261(A-2G-
- n261 CA_n261(2G) CA_n261(2O) 800 0
2O)
CA_n261
CA_n261(A-3G) - n261 CA_n261(3G) 800 0
O
CA_n261(A-3G-O) - n261 CA_n261(3G) 800 0
CA_n261(A-2G) CA_n261G n261 CA_n261(2G) 800
CA_n261(A-4G) - n261 CA_n261(4G) 800 0
CA_n261G CA_n2
CA_n261(A-H) n261 700 0
CA_n261H 61H
CA_n261(A-2H) - n261 CA_n261(2H) 800 0
CA_n2
CA_n261(A-H-I) - n261 CA_n261I 800 0
61H
CA_n261G
CA_n2
CA_n261(A-I) CA_n261H n261 800 0
61I
CA_n261I
CA_n261(A-2I) - n261 CA_n261(2I) 800 0
CA_n261G
CA_n2
CA_n261(A-J) CA_n261H n261 700 0
61J
CA_n261I
CA_n261G
CA_n2
CA_n261(A-K) CA_n261H n261 800 0
61K
CA_n261I
CA_n2
CA_n261(A-O) - n261 600 0
61O
CA_n261(A-2O) - n261 CA_n261(2O) 800 0
CA_n261(A-3O) - n261 CA_n261(3O) 800 0
CA_n261(A-4O) - n261 CA_n261(4O) 800 0
ETSI
CA_n261(A-5O) - n261 CA_n261(5O) 800 0

CA_n261(A-6O) - n261 CA_n261(6O) 800 0
CA_n261(A-7O) - n261 CA_n261(7O) 800 0
CA_n2
CA_n261(A-P) - n261 700 0
61P
CA_n261(A-2P) - n261 CA_n261(2P) 800 0
CA_n2
CA_n261(A-Q) - n261 800 0
61Q
CA_n261(A-2Q) - n261 CA_n261(2Q) 800 0
CA_n261
CA_n261(2A-G) CA_n261G CA_n261(2A) 800 0
G
CA_n261G CA_n261
CA_n261(2A-H) CA_n261(2A) 800 0
CA_n261H H
CA_n261G
CA_n261(2A-I) CA_n261H CA_n261(2A) CA_n261I 800 0
CA_n261I
CA_n26
CA_n261(3A-G) CA_n261G CA_n261(3A) 800 0
1G

CA_n261(D-G) 600 0
CA_n261G D 61G

CA_n261(D-H) 700 0
CA_n261H D 61H

CA_n261(D-I) 800 0
CA_n261I D 61I

CA_n261(D-O) 600 0
CA_n261O D 61O
CA_n261
CA_n261(D-2O) - CA_n261(2O) 800 0
D
CA_n261(D-P) 700 0
CA_n261P D 61P

CA_n261(D-Q) 800 0
CA_n261Q D 61Q
CA_n261E CA_n2
CA_n261(E-O) CA_n261E 800 0
CA_n261O 61O
ETSI
CA_n261E CA_n2
CA_n261(E-P) CA_n261E 800 0
CA_n261P 61P
CA_n261E CA_n2
CA_n261(E-Q) CA_n261E 800 0
CA_n261Q 61Q
CA_n261G
CA_n261 CA_n2
CA_n261(G-I) CA_n261H 600 0
G 61I
CA_n261I
CA_n261(G-H) 500 0
CA_n261H G 61H
CA_n261(2G-2O) - CA_n261(2G) CA_n261(2O) 800 0
CA_n261 CA_n2
CA_n261(G-O) - 400 0
G 61O
CA_n261
CA_n261(G-2O) - CA_n261(2O) 600 0
G
CA_n261
CA_n261(2G-O) - CA_n261(2G) 600 0
O
CA_n26
CA_n261(3G-O) - CA_n261(3G) 800 0
1O
CA_n261G
CA_n261 CA_n2
CA_n261(H-I) CA_n261H 700 0
H 61I
CA_n261I
NOTE 1: Void
NOTE 2: Void
NOTE 3: Channel bandwidth per operating band defined in Table 5.3.5-1
NOTE 4: Configurations for intra-band contiguous CA defined in Table 5.5A.1-1
NOTE 5: Configurations for intra-band non-contiguous CA defined in Table 5.5A.2-1
NOTE 6: Void
NOTE 7: Unless otherwise stated, BCS0 is referred in each constituent CA configuration.
NOTE 8: Σ(BW Channel,block) denotes the maximum total bandwidth from the summation of the sub-block bandwidths and shall be less than the bandwidth of the operating band.
5.5D Configurations for UL MIMO

The requirements specified in clause 5.5 are applicable to UE supporting UL MIMO.
ETSI
6 Transmitter characteristics
6.1 General
Unless otherwise stated, the transmitter characteristics are specified over the air (OTA) with a single or multiple
transmit chains.
Unless otherwise stated, for power class 3 UEs, the beam correspondence side condition for SSB and CSI-RS specified
in clause 6.6.4 shall apply to the transmission tests.
Transmitter requirements for CA operation apply only when the DMRS initialization parameters (including the case
when the UE applies cell ID as DMRS scrambling ID) are different across all CCs. The UE may use higher MPR values
outside this limitation.
Transmitter requirements for UL MIMO operation apply when the UE transmits on 2 ports on the same CDM group.
The UE may use higher MPR values outside this limitation.
6.2 Transmitter power

6.2.1 UE maximum output power
6.2.1.0 General
NOTE: Power class 1, 2, 3, and 4 are specified based on the assumption of certain UE types with specific device
architectures. The UE types can be found in Table 6.2.1.0-1.
Table 6.2.1.0-1: Assumption of UE Types

UE Power class UE type
1 Fixed wireless access (FWA) UE
2 Vehicular UE
3 Handheld UE
4 High power non-handheld UE
Power class 3 is default power class.
6.2.1.1 UE maximum output power for power class 1

The following requirements define the maximum output power radiated by the UE for any transmission bandwidth
within the channel bandwidth for non-CA configuration, unless otherwise stated. The period of measurement shall be at
least one sub frame (1ms). The minimum output power values for EIRP are found in Table 6.2.1.1-1. The requirement
is verified with the test metric of EIRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
Table 6.2.1.1-1: UE minimum peak EIRP for power class 1

Operating band Min peak EIRP (dBm)
n257 40.0
n258 40.0
n260 38.0
n261 40.0
NOTE 1: Minimum peak EIRP is defined as the lower limit without tolerance
The maximum output power values for TRP and EIRP are found in Table 6.2.1.1-2 below. The maximum allowed EIRP
is derived from regulatory requirements [8]. The requirements are verified with the test metrics of TRP (Link=TX beam
peak direction, Meas=TRP grid) in beam locked mode and EIRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
ETSI
Table 6.2.1.1-2: UE maximum output power limits for power class 1

Operating band Max TRP (dBm) Max EIRP (dBm)
n257 35 55
n258 35 55
n260 35 55
n261 35 55
The minimum EIRP at the 85th percentile of the distribution of radiated power measured over the full sphere around the
UE is defined as the spherical coverage requirement and is found in Table 6.2.1.1-3 below. The requirement is verified
with the test metric of EIRP (Link=Spherical coverage grid, Meas=Link angle).
Table 6.2.1.1-3: UE spherical coverage for power class 1

Operating band Min EIRP at 85 %-tile CDF (dBm)
n257 32.0
n258 32.0
n260 30.0
n261 32.0
NOTE 1: Minimum EIRP at 85 %-tile CDF is defined as
the lower limit without tolerance
NOTE 2: The requirements in this table are verified only
under normal temperature conditions as
defined in Annex E.2.1.


n257 29
n258 29
n261 29

n257 23 43
n258 23 43
n261 23 43
ETSI

n257 18.0
n258 18.0
n261 18.0

is verified with the test metric of total component of EIRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle). The
requirement for the UE which supports a single FR2 band is specified in Table 6.2.1.3-1. The requirement for the UE
which supports multiple FR2 bands is specified in both Table 6.2.1.3-1 and Table 6.2.1.3-4.

n257 22.4
n258 22.4
n259 18.7
n260 20.6
n261 22.4
NOTE 1: Minimum peak EIRP is defined as the
lower limit without tolerance
NOTE 2: Void
The maximum output power values for TRP and EIRP are found on the Table 6.2.1.3-2. The max allowed EIRP is
derived from regulatory requirements [8]. The requirements are verified with the test metrics of TRP (Link=TX beam
peak direction, Meas=TRP grid) in beam locked mode and the total component of EIRP (Link=TX beam peak direction,
Meas=Link angle.

n257 23 43
n258 23 43
n259 23 43
n260 23 43
n261 23 43
with the test metric of the total component of EIRP (Link=Beam peak search grids, Meas=Link angle). The requirement
for the UE which supports a single FR2 band is specified in Table 6.2.1.3-3. The requirement for the UE which supports
multiple FR2 bands is specified in both Table 6.2.1.3-3 and Table 6.2.1.3-4.
ETSI

Min EIRP at 50 %-tile CDF
Operating band
(dBm)
n257 11.5
n258 11.5
n259 5.8
n260 8
n261 11.5
NOTE 1: Minimum EIRP at 50 %-tile CDF is defined as the
NOTE 2: Void
NOTE 3: The requirements in this table are verified only under
normal temperature conditions as defined in Annex
E.2.1.
For the UEs that support multiple FR2 bands, minimum requirement for peak EIRP and EIRP spherical coverage in
Tables 6.2.1.3-1 and 6.2.1.3-3 shall be decreased per band, respectively, by the peak EIRP relaxation parameter ΔMBP,n
and EIRP spherical coverage relaxation parameter ΔMBS,n, as defined in Table 6.2.1.3-4..
Table 6.2.1.3-4: UE multi-band relaxation factors for power class 3
Band ΔMBP,n (dB) ΔMBS,n (dB)

n257 0.73 0.73
n258 0.6 0.7
n259 0.5 0.4
n260 0.51 0.41
n261 0.52,4 0.74
Note 1: n260 peak and spherical relaxations are 0 dB for UE that exclusively supports
n261+n260
Note 2: n261 peak relaxation is 0 dB for UE that exclusively supports n261+n260
n261+n257
n261+n257


n257 34
n258 34
n260 31
n261 34
ETSI

n257 23 43
n258 23 43
n260 23 43
n261 23 43

n257 25
n258 25
n260 19
n261 25
6.2.2 UE maximum output power reduction
6.2.2.0 General
The requirements in clause 6.2.2 only apply when both UL and DL of a UE are configured for single CC operation, and
they are of the same bandwidth. A UE may reduce its maximum output power due to modulation orders, transmit
bandwidth configurations, waveform types and narrow allocations. This Maximum Power Reduction (MPR) is defined
in clauses below. The allowed MPR for SRS, PUCCH formats 0, 1, 3 and 4, and PRACH shall be as specified for
QPSK modulated DFT-s-OFDM of equivalent RB allocation. The allowed MPR for PUCCH format 2 shall be as
specified for QPSK modulated CP-OFDM of equivalent RB allocation. When the maximum output power of a UE is
modified by MPR, the power limits specified in clause 6.2.4 apply.
For a UE that is configured for single CC operation with different channel bandwidths in UL and DL, the requirements
in clause 6.2A.2 apply.
For all power classes, the waveform defined by BW = 100 MHz, SCS = 120 kHz, DFT-S-OFDM QPSK, 20RB23 is the
reference waveform with 0 dB MPR and is used for the power class definition.
6.2.2.1 UE maximum output power reduction for power class 1

For power class 1, MPR for contiguous allocations is defined as:
MPR = max(MPRWT, MPRnarrow)
Where,
MPRnarrow = 14.4 dB, when BWalloc,RB ≤ 1.44 MHz, MPRnarrow = 10 dB, when 1.44 MHz < BWalloc,RB ≤ 10.8 MHz,
where BWalloc,RB is the bandwidth of the RB allocation size.
MPRWT is the maximum power reduction due to modulation orders, transmission bandwidth configurations listed
in table 5.3.2-1, and waveform types. MPRWT is defined in Tables 6.2.2.1-1 and 6.2.2.1-2.
ETSI
Table 6.2.2.1-1 MPRWT for power class 1, BWchannel ≤ 200 MHz

MPRWT (dB), BWchannel ≤ 200 MHz
Modulation Outer RB allocations Inner RB allocations
Region 1 Region 2
Pi/2 BPSK ≤ 5.5 0.0 ≤ 3.0
QPSK ≤ 6.5 0.0 ≤ 3.0
DFT-s-OFDM
16 QAM ≤ 6.5 ≤ 4.0 ≤ 4.0
64 QAM ≤ 6.5 ≤ 5.0 ≤ 5.0
QPSK ≤ 7.0 ≤ 4.5 ≤ 4.5
CP-OFDM 16 QAM ≤ 7.0 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 5.5
64 QAM ≤ 7.5 ≤ 7.5 ≤ 7.5
Table 6.2.2.1-2 MPRWT for power class 1, BWchannel = 400 MHz

MPRWT (dB), BWchannel = 400 MHz
Modulation Outer RB allocations Inner RB allocations
Region 1 Region 2
Pi/2 BPSK ≤ 5.5 0.0 ≤ 3.0
QPSK ≤ 6.5 0.0 ≤ 3.5
DFT-s-OFDM
16 QAM ≤ 6.5 ≤ 4.5 ≤ 4.5
64 QAM ≤ 6.5 ≤ 6.5 ≤ 6.5
QPSK ≤ 7.0 ≤ 5.0 ≤ 5.0
CP-OFDM 16 QAM ≤ 7.0 ≤ 6.5 ≤ 6.5
64 QAM ≤ 9.0 ≤ 9.0 ≤ 9.0
Where the following parameters are defined to specify valid RB allocation ranges for the RB allocations regions in
Tables 6.2.2.1-1 and 6.2.2.1-2:
NRB is the maximum number of RBs for a given Channel bandwidth and sub-carrier spacing defined in Table 5.3.2-1.
RBend = RBStart + LCRB - 1
RBStart,Low = Max(1, Floor(LCRB/2))
RBStart,High = NRB – RBStart,Low – LCRB
An RB allocation is an Outer RB allocation if
RBStart < RBStart,Low OR RBStart > RBStart,High OR LCRB > Ceil(NRB/2)
An RB allocation belonging to table 6.2.2.1-1 is a Region 1 inner RB allocation if
RBstart ≥ Ceil(1/3 NRB) AND RBend < Ceil(2/3 NRB)
RBstart ≥ Ceil(1/4 NRB) AND RBend < Ceil(3/4 NRB) AND LCRB ≤ Ceil(1/4 NRB)
An RB allocation is a Region 2 inner allocation if it is NOT an Outer allocation AND NOT a Region 1 inner allocation
For the UE maximum output power modified by MPR, the power limits specified in clause 6.2.4 apply.

For power class 2, MPR specified in clause 6.2.2.3 applies.
Table 6.2.2.2-1: Void
ETSI

For power class 3, MPR for contiguous allocations is defined as:
MPR = max(MPRWT, MPRnarrow)
For transmission bandwidth configuration less than or equal to 200MHz,
MPRnarrow = 2.5 dB, when LCRB is less than or equal to 1.44 MHz, and 0 ≤ RBstart < Ceil(1/3 NRB) or Ceil(2/3NRB) ≤
RBstart ≤ NRB-LCRB, MPRnarrow = 2.0 dB, when 1.44 MHz < LCRB <= 4.32 MHz, and 0 ≤ RBstart < Ceil(1/3 NRB) or
Ceil(2/3NRB) ≤ RBstart ≤ NRB-LCRB, otherwise MPRnarrow = 0 dB when RB size is greater than 4.32 MHz, where NRB is
the maximum transmission bandwidth configuration defined in Table 5.3.2-1.
MPRWT is the maximum power reduction due to modulation orders, transmission bandwidth configurations listed in
Table 5.3.2-1, and waveform types. MPRWT is defined in Table 6.2.2.3-1.
Table 6.2.2.3-1 MPRWT for power class 3, BWchannel ≤ 200 MHz

MPRWT, BWchannel ≤ 200 MHz
Modulation Inner RB allocations, Edge RB allocations
Region 1
Pi/2 BPSK 0.0 ≤ 2.0
QPSK 0.0 ≤ 2.0
DFT-s-OFDM
16 QAM ≤ 3.0 ≤ 3.5
64 QAM ≤ 5.0 ≤ 5.5
QPSK ≤ 3.5 ≤ 4.0
CP-OFDM 16 QAM ≤ 5.0 ≤ 5.0
64 QAM ≤ 7.5 ≤ 7.5
Where the following parameters are defined to specify valid RB allocation ranges for RB allocations in Table
6.2.2.3-1:
- RBStart,Low = max(1, LCRB), where max() indicates the largest value of all arguments.
- RBStart,High = NRB – RBStart,Low – LCRB,
An RB allocation belonging to table 6.2.2.3-1 is a Region 1 inner RB allocation if:
- RBStart,Low ≤ RBStart ≤ RBStart,High, and LCRB ≤ ceil(NRB/3), where ceil(x) is the smallest integer greater than or
equal to x.
For transmission bandwidth configuration equal to 400MHz,
MPRnarrow = 2.5 dB, when LCRB is less than or equal to 1.44 MHz, and 0 ≤ RBstart < Ceil(1/3 NRB) or Ceil(2/3NRB) ≤
RBstart ≤ NRB-LCRB, where NRB is the maximum transmission bandwidth configuration defined in Table 5.3.2-1.
MPRWT is the maximum power reduction due to modulation orders, transmission bandwidth configurations listed in
Table 5.3.2-1, and waveform types. MPRWT is defined in Table 6.2.2.3-2.
Table 6.2.2.3-2 MPRWT for power class 3, BWchannel = 400 MHz

MPRWT, BWchannel = 400 MHz
Modulation Inner RB allocations, Edge RB allocations
Region 1
Pi/2 BPSK 0.0 ≤ 3.0
QPSK 0.0 ≤ 3.0
DFT-s-OFDM
16 QAM ≤ 4.5 ≤ 4.5
64 QAM ≤ 6.5 ≤ 6.5
QPSK ≤ 5.0 ≤ 5.0
CP-OFDM 16 QAM ≤ 6.5 ≤ 6.5
64 QAM ≤ 9.0 ≤ 9.0
ETSI
Where the following parameters are defined to specify valid RB allocation ranges for RB allocations in Table 6.2.2.3-2:
NRB is the maximum number of RBs for a given Channel bandwidth and sub-carrier spacing defined in Table 5.3.2-1.
RBend = RBStart + LCRB - 1
RBstart ≥ Ceil(1/4 NRB) AND RBend < Ceil(3/4 NRB) AND LCRB ≤ Ceil(1/4 NRB)
For all transmission bandwidth configurations, an RB allocation is an Edge allocation if it is NOT a Region 1 inner
allocation.

For power class 4, MPR specified in sub-clause 6.2.2.3 applies.
Table 6.2.2.4-1: Void
6.2.3 UE maximum output power with additional requirements
6.2.3.1 General
Additional emission requirements can be signalled by the network. Each additional emission requirement is associated
with a unique network signalling (NS) value indicated in RRC signalling by an NR frequency band number of the
applicable operating band and an associated value in the field additionalSpectrumEmission. Throughout this
specification, the notion of indication or signalling of an NS value refers to the corresponding indication of an NR
frequency band number of the applicable operating band (the IE field freqBandIndicatorNR) and an associated value of
additionalSpectrumEmission in the relevant RRC information elements
To meet these additional requirements, additional maximum power reduction (A-MPR) is allowed for the maximum
output power as specified in clause 6.2.1. Unless stated otherwise, an A-MPR of 0 dB shall be used.
Table 6.2.3.1-1 specifies the additional requirements with their associated network signalling values and the allowed A-
MPR and applicable operating band(s) for each NS value. The mapping of NR frequency band numbers and values of
and the additionalSpectrumEmission to network signalling labels is specified in Table 6.2.3.1-2. Unless otherwise
stated, the allowed total back off is maximum of A-MPR and MPR specified in clause 6.2.2.
Table 6.2.3.1-1: Additional maximum power reduction (A-MPR)

Network Requirements NR Band Channel Resources A-MPR
Signalling (clause) bandwidth Blocks (NRB) (dB)
label (MHz)
NS_200 N/A
NS_201 6.5.3.2.2 n258 6.2.3.2
NS_202 6.5.3.2.3 n257, n258 6.2.3.3
ETSI
Table 6.2.3.1-2: Mapping of Network Signaling label

NR Band Value of additionalSpectrumEmission
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
n257 NS_200 NS_202

n258 NS_200 NS_201 NS_202
n259 NS_200
n260 NS_200
n261 NS_200
NOTE: additionalSpectrumEmission corresponds to an information element of the same name defined in
sub-clause 6.3.2 of TS 38.331 [13].
6.2.3.2 A-MPR for NS_201
6.2.3.2.1 A-MPR for NS_201 for power class 1

For power class 1, A-MPR for NS_201 shall be 9 dB.
Table 6.2.3.2.1-1: (Void)

For power class 2, A-MPR specified in clause 6.2.3.2.3 applies
Table 6.2.3.2.2-1: (Void)

Table 6.2.3.2.3-1: AMPR for NS_201 for power class 3
Channel Bandwidth, MHz

Offset Frequency 400
Outer RB allocations
0 MHz, ≤ 100 MHz ≤ 1.5
> 100 MHz, ≤ 300 MHz 0
> 300 MHz 0
NOTE 1: The Offset frequency is defined as the frequency from 24.25 GHz to the
lower channel edge.
NOTE 2: The allowable back off is max(MPR, AMPR), where the MPR is defined
in Table 6.2.2.3-1
NOTE 3: Any undefined region, MPR applies

For power class 4, A-MPR for NS_201 specified in clause 6.2.3.2.3 applies.
6.2.3.3 A-MPR for NS_202

For power class 1, A-MPR for NS_202 shall be 11.0 dB.
ETSI


For power class 3, A-MPR for NS_202 shall be 1.0 dB.

6.2.4 Configured transmitted power

The UE can configure its maximum output power. The configured UE maximum output power PCMAX,f,c for carrier f of
a serving cell c is defined as that available to the reference point of a given transmitter branch that corresponds to the
reference point of the higher-layer filtered RSRP measurement as specified in TS 38.215 [11].
The configured UE maximum output power PCMAX,f,c for carrier f of a serving cell c shall be set such that the
corresponding measured peak EIRP PUMAX,f,c is within the following bounds
PPowerclass – MAX(MAX(MPRf,c, A- MPRf,c,) + ΔMBP,n, P-MPRf,c) – MAX{T(MAX(MPRf,c, A- MPRf,c,)), T(P-MPRf,c)}

≤ PUMAX,f,c ≤ EIRPmax
while the corresponding measured total radiated power PTMAX,f,c is bounded by
PTMAX,f,c ≤ TRPmax
with PPowerclass the UE power class as specified in sub-clause 6.2.1, EIRPmax the applicable maximum EIRP as specified
in sub-clause 6.2.1, MPRf,c as specified in sub-clause 6.2.2 , A-MPRf,c as specified in sub-clause 6.2.3, ΔMBP,n the peak
EIRP relaxation as specified in clause 6.2.1 and TRPmax the maximum TRP for the UE power class as specified in sub-
clause 6.2.1.
maxUplinkDutyCycle-FR2, as defined in TS 38.306 [14], is a UE capability to facilitate electromagnetic power density

exposure requirements. This UE capability is applicable to all FR2 power classes.
If the field of UE capability maxUplinkDutyCycle-FR2 is present and the percentage of uplink symbols transmitted
within any 1 s evaluation period is larger than maxUplinkDutyCycle-FR2, the UE follows the uplink scheduling and can
apply P-MPRf,c.
If the field of UE capability maxUplinkDutyCycle-FR2 is absent, the compliance to electromagnetic power density
exposure requirements are ensured by means of scaling down the power density or by other means.
P-MPRf,c is the allowed maximum output power reduction. The UE shall apply P-MPRf,c for carrier f of serving cell c
only for the cases described below. For UE conformance testing P-MPRf,c shall be 0 dB.
a) ensuring compliance with applicable electromagnetic power density exposure requirements and addressing
unwanted emissions / self desense requirements in case of simultaneous transmissions on multiple RAT(s) for
scenarios not in scope of 3GPP RAN specifications;
b) ensuring compliance with applicable electromagnetic power density exposure requirements in case of proximity
detection is used to address such requirements that require a lower maximum output power.
NOTE 1: P-MPRf,c was introduced in the PCMAX,f,c equation such that the UE can report to the gNB the available
maximum output transmit power. This information can be used by the gNB for scheduling decisions.
NOTE 2: P-MPRf,c and maxUplinkDutyCycle-FR2 may impact the maximum uplink performance for the selected
UL transmission path.
The tolerance T(∆P) for applicable values of ∆P (values in dB) is specified in Table 6.2.4-1.
ETSI
Table 6.2.4-1: PUMAX,f,c tolerance

Tolerance T(∆P)
Operating Band ∆P (dB)
(dB)
ΔP = 0 0
0 < ΔP ≤ 2 1.5
2 < ΔP ≤ 3 2.0
n257, n258, n259, 3 < ΔP ≤ 4 3.0
n260, n261 4 < ΔP ≤ 5 4.0
5 < ΔP ≤ 10 5.0
10 < ΔP ≤ 15 7.0
15 < ΔP ≤ X 8.0
NOTE: X is the value such that Pumax,f,c lower bound, PPowerclass -
ΔP – T(ΔP) = minimum output power specified in clause
6.3.1
6.2A Transmitter power for CA

6.2A.1 UE maximum output power for CA
For downlink intra-band contiguous and non-contiguous carrier aggregation with a single uplink component carrier
configured in the NR band, the maximum output power is specified in clause 6.2.1.
For uplink intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation for any CA bandwidth class, the maximum output power is
specified in clause 6.2.1.
Power class 3 is default power class.
6.2A.2 UE maximum output power reduction for CA
6.2A.2.1 General
The UE is defined to be configured for CA operation when it has at least one of UL or DL configured for CA. In CA
operation, the UE may reduce its maximum output power due to higher order modulations and transmit bandwidth
configurations. This Maximum Power Reduction (MPR) is defined in clauses below.
The cumulative aggregated channel bandwidth is defined as the frequency band from the lowest edge of the lowest CC
to the upper edge of the highest CC of all UL and DL configured CCs. When the maximum output power of a UE is
modified by MPR, the power limits specified in clause 6.2A.4 apply.
The requirements in the following clauses are only applicable to intra-band contiguous uplink CA, with the aggregated
channelbandwidth up to 800 MHz.
6.2A.2.2 Maximum output power reduction for power class 1

For power class 1, MPR for UL contiguous allocations within the cumulative aggregated bandwidth is defined as:
MPRC_CA = max(MPRWT_C_CA, MPRnarrow)
Where,
MPRnarrow = 14.4 dB, when BWalloc,RB is less than or equal to 1.44 MHz, MPRnarrow = 10 dB, when 1.44 MHz <
BWalloc,RB ≤ 10.8 MHz, where BWalloc,RB is the bandwidth of the RB allocation size.
MPRWT_C_CA is the maximum power reduction due to modulation orders, transmit bandwidth configurations, and
waveform types. MPRWT_C_CA is defined in Table 6.2A.2.2-1.
ETSI
Table 6.2A.2.2-1: Maximum power reduction (MPRWT_C_CA) for UE power class 1

Waveform Type Cumulative aggregated channel bandwidth
< 400 MHz ≥ 400 MHz and ≥ 800 MHz and
< 800 MHz ≤ 1400 MHz
Pi/2 BPSK ≤ 5.51 7.71 [8.2]
QPSK ≤ 6.51 8.71 [9.7]
DFT-s-OFDM
16 QAM ≤ 6.5 8.7 [9.2]
64 QAM ≤ 9.0 10.7 [11.2]
QPSK ≤ 6.5 8.7 [8.7]
CP-OFDM 16 QAM ≤ 6.5 8.7 [8.7]
64 QAM ≤ 9.0 10.7 [11.2]
NOTE 1: (Void)
In case of a contiguous RB, DFT-s-BPSK or DFT-s-QPSK UL allocation in a single CC of a CA configuration whose

cumulative aggregated BW ≤ 400 MHz, MPRWT_C_CA shall be derived instead as MAX(MPR1, MPR2), where:
MPR1 shall be determined from Table 6.2.2.1-1 if CABW ≤ 200 MHz, from Table 6.2.2.1-2 if CABW > 200 MHz.
MPR2 shall be determined from Table 6.2.2.1-1 if BWchannel_CA ≤ 200 MHz, from Table 6.2.2.1-2 if BWchannel_CA >
200 MHz.
and assume all UL CCs use the same SCS for the purpose of determination of inner and outer RB allocations in Table
6.2.2.1-1 and Table 6.2.2.1-2:
NRB shall be chosen as the sum of NRB of all constituent UL CCs in the CA configuration.
LCRB shall be chosen as BWalloc,RB
RBstart shall be derived as: RBstart_allocatedCC+NRB_unallocatedCC_low
RBstart_allocatedCC is the index of the first unallocated RB in the CC with allocation
NRB_unallocatedCC_low is the sum of NRB in all UL CCs lower in frequency compared to the CC with allocation
BWchannel_CA is the aggregated channel bandwidth of the UL CA configuration
When different waveform types exist across CCs, the requirement is set by the waveform type used in the configuration
with the largest MPRC_CA.
For non-contiguous RB allocations, the following rule for MPR applies:
MPR = max(MPRC_CA, -10*A + 14.4)
Where:
A = NRB_alloc / NRB_agg_C.
NRB_alloc is the total number of allocated UL RBs
NRB_agg_C is the number of the aggregated RBs within the fully allocated cumulative aggregated channel bandwidth

For power class 2, MPR specified in sub-clause 6.2A.2.4 applies.
Table 6.2A.2.3-1: (Void)

For power class 3, MPR for UL contiguous allocations within the cumulative aggregated bandwidth is denoted as
MPRC_CA and is defined in Table 6.2A.2.4-1.
ETSI
Table 6.2A.2.4-1: Maximum power reduction (MPRC_CA) for UE power class 3

Cumulative aggregated bandwidth configuration
≤ 400 MHz > 400 MHz and < ≥ 800 MHz and ≤
800 MHz 1400 MHz
Pi/2 BPSK ≤ 5.01 ≤ 7.71 ≤ [8.2]
QPSK ≤ 5.01 ≤ 7.71 ≤ [8.2]
DFT-s-OFDM
16 QAM ≤ 6.5 ≤ 8.7 ≤ [9.3]
64 QAM ≤ 9.0 ≤ 10.7 ≤ [11.2]
QPSK ≤ 5.0 ≤ 7.5 ≤ [8.0]
CP-OFDM 16 QAM ≤ 6.5 ≤ 8.7 ≤ [9.2]
64 QAM ≤ 9.0 ≤ 10.7 ≤ [11.2]
NOTE 1: (Void).
In case of a contiguous RB, DFT-s-BPSK or DFT-s-QPSK UL allocation in a single CC of a CA configuration whose

cumulative aggregated BW ≤ 400 MHz, MPRWT_C_CA shall be derived instead as MAX(MPR1, MPR2), where:
MPR1 shall be determined from Table 6.2.2.3-1 if CABW ≤ 200 MHz, from Table 6.2.2.3-2 if CABW > 200 MHz.
MPR2 shall be determined from Table 6.2.2.3-1 if BWchannel_CA ≤ 200 MHz, from Table 6.2.2.3-2 if BWchannel_CA >
200 MHz.
and assume all UL CCs use the same SCS for the purpose of determination of inner and outer RB allocations in Table
6.2.2.3-1 and Table 6.2.2.3-2:
NRB shall be chosen as the sum of NRB of all constituent UL CCs in the CA configuration.
LCRB shall be chosen as BWalloc,RB
RBstart shall be derived as: RBstart_allocatedCC+NRB_unallocatedCC_low
RBstart_allocatedCC is the index of the first unallocated RB in the CC with allocation
NRB_unallocatedCC_low is the sum of NRB in all UL CCs lower in frequency compared to the CC with allocation
BWchannel_CA is the aggregated channel bandwidth of the UL CA configurationWhen different waveform types exist
across CCs, the requirement is set by the waveform type used in the configuration with the highest contiguous MPR.
For non-contiguous RB allocations, the following rule for MPR applies:
MPR = max(MPRC_CA, -10*A +7.0)
Where:
A = NRB_alloc / NRB_agg_C.
NRB_alloc is the total number of allocated UL RBs
NRB_agg_C is the number of the aggregated RBs within the fully allocated cumulative aggregated channel bandwidth

For power class 4, MPR specified in sub-clause 6.2A.2.4 applies.
6.2A.3 UE maximum output power with additional requirements for CA
6.2A.3.1 General
Additional emission requirements can be signalled by the network with network signalling value indicated by the field
additionalSpectrumEmission. To meet these additional requirements, additional maximum power reduction (A-MPR) is
allowed for the maximum output power as specified in clause 6.2A.1. Unless stated otherwise, an A-MPR of 0 dB shall
be used. Unless otherwise stated, the allowed total back off is maximum of A-MPR and MPR specified in
clause 6.2A.2.
ETSI
For intra-band contiguous aggregation with the UE configured for transmissions on two serving cells, the maximum
output power reduction specified in Table 6.2A.3.1-1 is allowed for all serving cells of the applicable uplink contiguous
CA configurations according to the CA network signalling value indicated by the field
additionalSpectrumEmissionSCell.
Table 6.2A.3.1-1 specifies the additional requirements and allowed A-MPR with corresponding network signalling
label and operating band. The mapping between network signalling labels and the additionalSpectrumEmission IE
defined in TS 38.331 [13] is specified in Table 6.2A.3.1-2. Unless otherwise stated, the allowed total back off is
maximum of A-MPR and MPR specified in clause 6.2A.2.
Table 6.2A.3.1-1: Additional maximum power reduction (A-MPR)

Network Requirements NR Band Channel Resources A-MPR
Signalling (clause) bandwidth Blocks (NRB) (dB)
value (MHz)
CA_NS_200 N/A
CA_NS_201 6.5.3.2.2 n258 6.2A.3.2
CA_NS_202 6.5.3.2.3 n257, n258 6.2A.3.3
Table 6.2A.3.1-2: Value of additionalSpectrumEmission
NR Band Value of additionalSpectrumEmission / NS number

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
n257 CA_NS_200 CA_NS_202

n258 CA_NS_200 CA_NS_201 CA_NS_202
n259 CA_NS_200
n260 CA_NS_200
n261 CA_NS_200
NOTE: additionalSpectrumEmission corresponds to an information element of the same name defined in
clause 6.3.2 of TS 38.331 [13].
6.2A.3.2 A-MPR for CA_NS_201
6.2A.3.2.1 A-MPR for CA_NS_201 for power class 1

For intra-band contiguous CA, AMPR is specified as follows.
Table 6.2A.3.2.1-1: (Void)
For power class 1 CA non-contiguous RB allocations, the following rule for AMPR (dB) applies:
AMPR = max(AMPRC_CA, -10*A +12.0)
Where AMPRC_CA is 9.0

For intra-band contiguous CA, A-MPR specified in sub-clause 6.2A.3.2.3 applies.
Table 6.2A.3.2.2-1: (Void)
ETSI

For intra-band contiguous CA, AMPR is specified as follows.
Table 6.2A.3.2.3-1: Contiguous Allocations, AMPRC_CA for CA_NS_201 for power class 3
Cumulative Aggregated Bandwidth, MHz

Offset Frequency ≥ 400,
< 400
≤ 800
0 MHz, ≤ 100 MHz ≤ 1.5 ≤ 3.0
> 100 MHz, ≤ 300 MHz 0 0
> 300 MHz 0 0
NOTE 1: The Offset frequency is defined as the frequency from 24.25 GHz
to the lower channel edge.
NOTE 2: The allowable back off is max(MPR, AMPR), where the MPR is
defined in Table 6.2A.2.4-1.
NOTE 3: Any undefined region, MPR applies.
For power class 3 CA non-contiguous RB allocations, the following rule for AMPR applies:
AMPR = max(AMPRC_CA, - 10*A + 5.0) , Offset Frequency ≤ 550 MHz

For intra-band contiguous CA, A-MPR for CA_NS_201 specified in sub-clause 6.2A.3.2.3 applies.
6.2A.3.3 A-MPR for CA_NS_202

For intra-band contiguous CA, A-MPR for CA_NS_202 shall be 11.0 dB.


For intra-band contiguous CA, A-MPR for CA_NS_202 shall be 2.0 dB.

6.2A.4 Configured transmitted power for CA

A UE configured with carrier aggregation can configure its maximum output power for each uplink activated serving
cell c and its total configured maximum output power PCMAX. The definition of the configured UE maximum output
power PCMAX,f,c for each carrier f of a serving cell c is used for power headroom reporting for carrier f of serving cell c
only and is in accordance with that specified in clause 6.2.4 with parameters MPR, A-MPR and P-MPR replaced with
those specified in subclause 6.2A.2, 6.2A.3 and 6.2.4, respectively. The UE maximum configured power PCMAX in a
transmission occasion is determined by the UL grants for carrier f of serving cell’s c(i) with non-zero granted power in
the respective reference points.
For uplink intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, MPR is specified in clause 6.2A.2. PCMAX is calculated under the
assumption that power spectral density for each RB in each component carrier is same.
The configured UE maximum output power PCMAX shall be set such that the corresponding measured total peak EIRP
PUMAX is within the following bounds
ETSI
PPowerclass – MAX(MAX(MPR, A_MPR) + ΔMBP,n,,P-MPR) – MAX{T(MAX(MPR, A_MPR)),T(P-MPR)} ≤ PUMAX ≤

EIRPmax
with PPowerclass the peak EIRP as specified in sub-clause 6.2A.1, EIRPmax the applicable maximum EIRP as specified in
sub-clause 6.2A.1, MPR as specified in sub-clause 6.2A.2, A-MPR as specified in sub-clause 6.2A.3, ΔMBP,n the peak
EIRP relaxation as specified in clause 6.2.1, P-MPR the power management term for the UE as described in 6.2.4 and
TRPmax the maximum TRP for the UE power class as specified in sub-clause 6.2A.1.
The measured configured power PUMAX for carrier aggregation is defined as
ܲ௎ெ஺௑ = 10 logଵ଴ ෍ ‫݌‬௎ெ஺௑ ௙ ௖ , ,
௖௙ ௖
, ( )
where pUMAX,f,c is the linear value of the measured power PUMAX,f,c for carrier f=f(c) serving cell c.
The tolerance T(ΔP) for applicable values of ΔP (values in dB) is specified in Table 6.2A.4-1.
Table 6.2A.4-1: PUMAX tolerance
Tolerance T(∆P)
Operating Band ∆P (dB)
(dB)
ΔP = 0 0
0 < ΔP ≤ 2 1.5
2 < ΔP ≤ 3 2.0
n257, n258, n259, 3 < ΔP ≤ 4 3.0
n260, n261 4 < ΔP ≤ 5 4.0
5 < ΔP ≤ 10 5.0
10 < ΔP ≤ 15 7.0
15 < ΔP ≤ X 8.0
NOTE: X is the value such that Pumax lower bound, PPowerclass - ΔP
– T(ΔP) = minimum output power specified in clause
6.3A.1
6.2D Transmitter power for UL MIMO

6.2D.1 UE maximum output power for UL MIMO
6.2D.1.1 UE maximum output power for UL MIMO for power class 1

The following requirements define the maximum output power radiated by the UE with UL MIMO for any transmission
bandwidth within the channel bandwidth for non-CA configuration, unless otherwise stated.Requirements in Table
6.2D.1.1-1 shall be met with the UE configured for 2 layer UL MIMO transmission as specified in Table 6.2D.1.1-2.
The period of measurement shall be at least one sub frame (1ms). The requirement is verified with the test metric of
EIRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle). Power class 1 UE is used for fixed wireless access (FWA).
Table 6.2D.1.1-1: UE minimum peak EIRP for UL MIMO for power class 1
n257 40.0
n258 40.0
n260 38.0
n261 40.0
Table 6.2D.1.1-2: UL MIMO configuration
Transmission scheme DCI format TPMI Index

Codebook based uplink DCI format 0_1 0
ETSI
The maximum output power values for TRP and EIRP are found in Table 6.2D.1.1-3 below for UE with UL MIMO.
The maximum allowed EIRP is derived from regulatory requirements [8]. The requirements are verified with the test
metrics of TRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=TRP grid) in beam locked mode and EIRP (Link=TX beam peak
direction, Meas=Link angle).
Table 6.2D.1.1-3: UE maximum output power limits for UL MIMO for power class 1
n257 35 55
n258 35 55
n260 35 55
n261 35 55
UE with UL MIMO is defined as the spherical coverage requirement and is found in Table 6.2D.1.1-4 below. The
requirement is verified with the test metric of EIRP (Link=Spherical coverage grid, Meas=Link angle).
Table 6.2D.1.1-4: UE spherical coverage for UL MIMO for power class 1

n257 32.0
n258 32.0
n260 30.0
n261 32.0

bandwidth within the channel bandwidth for non-CA configuration, unless otherwise stated. Requirements in Table
6.2D.1.2-1 shall be met with the UE configured for 2 layer UL MIMO transmission specified in Table 6.2D.1.2-3. The
period of measurement shall be at least one sub frame (1ms). The requirement is verified with the test metric of EIRP
(Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
n257 29
n258 29
n261 29
lower limit without tolerance.
NOTE 2: Min Peak EIRP refers to the total EIRP
for the UL beams peaks.
The maximum output power values for TRP and EIRP are found in Table 6.2D.1.2-2 below. The maximum allowed
EIRP is derived from regulatory requirements [8]. The requirements are verified with the test metrics of TRP (Link=TX
beam peak direction, Meas=TRP grid) in beam locked mode and EIRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link
angle).
n257 23 43
n258 23 43
n261 23 43
ETSI

UE is defined as the spherical coverage requirement and is found in Table 6.2D.1.2-4 below. The requirement is
verified with the test metric of EIRP (Link=Spherical coverage grid, Meas=Link angle).

n257 18.0
n258 18.0
n261 18.0

period of measurement shall be at least one sub frame (1 ms). The requirement is verified with the test metric of EIRP
n257 22.4
n258 22.4
n259 18.7
n260 20.6
n261 22.4
NOTE 1: Minimum peak EIRP is defined as the lower limit without
tolerance.
NOTE 2: Min Peak EIRP refers to the total EIRP for the UL beams
peaks.
angle).
n257 23 43
n258 23 43
n259 23 43
n260 23 43
n261 23 43

ETSI
verified with the test metric of EIRP (Link=spherical coverage grid, Meas=Link angle).
n257 11.5
n258 11.5
n259 5.8
n260 8
n261 11.5
NOTE 1: Minimum EIRP at 50 %-tile CDF is defined as the lower limit
without tolerance
NOTE 2: The requirements in this table are only applicable for UE which
supports single band in FR2

period of measurement shall be at least one sub frame (1ms). The requirement is verified with the test metric of EIRP
n257 34
n258 34
n260 31
n261 34
NOTE 1: Minimum peak EIRP is defined as the lower limit without
tolerance.
NOTE 2: Min Peak EIRP refers to the total EIRP for the UL beams
peaks.
angle).
n257 23 43
n258 23 43
n260 23 43
n261 23 43

verified with the test metric of EIRP (Link=Spherical coverage grid, Meas=Link angle).
ETSI

n257 25
n258 25
n260 19
n261 25
6.2D.2 UE maximum output power reduction for modulation / channel

bandwidth for UL MIMO
6.2D.2.1 UE maximum output power reduction for modulation / channel bandwidth for
UL MIMO for power class 1
For UE with UL MIMO, the allowed Maximum Power Reduction (MPR) for the maximum output power in Table
6.2D.1.1-1 is specified in sub-clause 6.2.2.1. The requirements shall be met with UL MIMO configurations specified in
sub-clause 6.2D.1.1.
For the UE maximum output power modified by MPR, the power limits specified in clause 6.2D.4 apply.
ETSI
6.2D.3 UE maximum output power reduction with additional requirements

for UL MIMO
6.2D.3.1 UE maximum output power reduction with additional requirements for UL

MIMO for power class 1
For UE with UL MIMO, the A-MPR values specified in clause 6.2.3 shall apply to the maximum output power
specified in Table 6.2D.1.1-1. The requirements shall be met with the UL MIMO configurations specified in sub-clause
6.2D.1.1.
For the UE maximum output power modified by A-MPR, the power limits specified in clause 6.2D.4 apply.

specified in Table 6.2D.1.2-1. The requirements shall be met with the UL MIMO configurations specified in clause
6.2D.1.2.

6.2D.1.3.

6.2D.1.4.
6.2D.4 Configured transmitted power for UL MIMO

For UE configured with ULMIMO, the configured maximum output power PCMAX,c for serving cell c is defined as sum
of all streams and is bound by limits set in clause 6.2.4.
6.3 Output power dynamics

6.3.1 Minimum output power
6.3.1.0 General
The minimum controlled output power of the UE is defined as the EIRP in the channel bandwidth for all transmit
bandwidth configurations (resource blocks) when the power is set to a minimum value.
6.3.1.1 Minimum output power for power class 1

For power class 1 UE, the minimum output power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.3.1.1-1 for each
operating band supported. The minimum power is verified in beam locked mode with the test metric of EIRP (Link=TX
beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
ETSI
Table 6.3.1.1-1: Minimum output power for power class 1

Operating band Channel bandwidth Minimum output power Measurement bandwidth
(MHz) (dBm) (MHz)
n257, n258, n260, n261 50 4 47.52
100 4 95.04
200 4 190.08
400 4 380.16
6.3.1.2 Minimum output power for power class 2, 3, and 4

The minimum output power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.3.1.2-1 for each operating band supported.
The minimum power is verified in beam locked mode with the test metric of EIRP (Link=TX beam peak direction,
Meas=Link angle).
Table 6.3.1.2-1: Minimum output power for power class 2, 3, and 4

(MHz) (dBm) (MHz)
n257, n258, n259, n260, 50 -13 47.52
n261 100 -13 95.04
200 -13 190.08
400 -13 380.16
NOTE 1: n260 is not applied for power class 2.
NOTE 2: n259 is not applied for power class 2 and 4.
6.3.2 Transmit OFF power

The transmit OFF power is defined as the TRP in the channel bandwidth when the transmitter is OFF. The transmitter is
considered OFF when the UE is not allowed to transmit on any of its ports.
The transmit OFF power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.3.2-1 for each operating band supported. The
requirement is verified with the test metric of TRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=TRP grid).
Table 6.3.2-1: Transmit OFF power

Operating band Channel bandwidth / Transmit OFF power (dBm) / measurement
bandwidth
50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz
n257, n258, n259, n260, -35 -35 -35 -35
n261 47.52 MHz 95.04 MHz 190.08 MHz 380.16 MHz
6.3.3 Transmit ON/OFF time mask
6.3.3.1 General
The transmit ON/OFF time mask defines the transient period(s) allowed
- between transmit OFF power and transmit ON power symbols (transmit ON/OFF)
- between continuous ON-power transmissions when power change or RB hopping is applied.
In case of RB hopping, transition period is shared symmetrically.
Unless otherwise stated the minimum requirements in clause 6.5 apply also in transient periods.
The transmit ON/OFF time mask is defined as a directional requirement. The requirement is verified in beam locked
mode at beam peak direction. The maximum allowed EIRP OFF power level is -30dBm at beam peak direction. The
requirement is verified with the test metric of EIRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
ETSI
In the following sub-clauses, following definitions apply:
- A slot transmission is a Type A transmission.
- A long subslot transmission is a Type B transmission with more than 2 symbols.
- A short subslot transmission is a Type B transmission with 1 or 2 symbols.
6.3.3.2 General ON/OFF time mask

The general ON/OFF time mask defines the observation period allowed between transmit OFF and ON power.
ON/OFF scenarios include: contiguous, and non-contiguous transmission, etc
The OFF power measurement period is defined in a duration of at least one slot excluding any transient periods. The
ON power is defined as the mean power over one slot excluding any transient period.
Figure 6.3.3.2-1: General ON/OFF time mask for NR UL transmission in FR2
6.3.3.3 Transmit power time mask for slot and short or long subslot boundaries
The transmit power time mask for slot and a long subslot transmission boundaries defines the transient periods allowed
between slot and long subslot PUSCH transmissions. For PUSCH-PUCCH and PUSCH-SRS transitions and
multiplexing the time masks in sub-clause 6.3.3.7 apply.
The transmit power time mask for slot or long subslot and short subslot transmission boundaries defines the transient
periods allowed between slot or long subslot and short subslot transmissions. The time masks in sub-clause 6.3.3.8
apply.
The transmit power time mask for short subslot transmissiona boundaries defines the transient periods allowed between
short subslot transmissions. The time masks in sub-clause 6.3.3.9 apply.
6.3.3.4 PRACH time mask

The PRACH ON power is specified as the mean power over the PRACH measurement period excluding any transient
periods as shown in Figure 6.3.3.4-1. The measurement period for different PRACH preamble format is specified in
Table 6.3.3.4-1.
ETSI
Table 6.3.3.4-1: PRACH ON power measurement period
Format SCS Measurement period

60 kHz 0.035677 ms
A1
120 kHz 0.017839 ms
60 kHz 0.071354 ms
A2
120 kHz 0.035677 ms
60 kHz 0.107031 ms
A3
120 kHz 0.053516 ms
60 kHz 0.035091 ms
B1
120 kHz 0.0175455 ms
60 kHz 0.207617 ms
B4
120 kHz 0.103809 ms
60 kHz 0.035677 ms for front X1 occasion
0.035091 ms for last occasion
X1 = [2,5]
A1/B1
120 kHz 0.017839 ms for front X1occasion
X1 = [2,5]
X2 = [1,2]
A2/B2
X2 = [1,2]
60 kHz 0.107031 ms for first occasion
0.104101 ms for second occasion
A3/B3
120 kHz 0.053515 ms for first occasion
0.052050 ms for second occasion
60 kHz 0.026758 ms
C0
120 kHz 0.013379 ms
60 kHz 0.083333 ms
C2
120 kHz 0.0416667 ms
NOTE: For PRACH on PRACH occasion start from begin of 0ms or 0.5 ms boundary,
the measurement period will plus 0.032552 μs
PRACH
Start of ON power End of ON power

requirement requirement Start of OFF power
End of OFF power
requirement
requirement
5µs
5µs Transient period
Transient period
Figure 6.3.3.4-1: PRACH ON/OFF time mask
6.3.3.5 Void
6.3.3.6 SRS time mask

In the case a single SRS transmission, the ON power is defined as the mean power over the symbol duration excluding
any transient period; Figure 6.3.3.6-1.
ETSI
SRS
SRS ON power
requirement Start of OFF power
End of OFF power
requirement
requirement
5µs
5µs
Transient period
Transient period
Figure 6.3.3.6-1: Single SRS time mask for NR UL transmission
In the case multiple consecutive SRS transmission, the ON power is defined as the mean power for each symbol
duration excluding any transient period. See Figure 7.7.4-2
SRS SRS SRS SRS
SRS ON power requirement on consecutive NR symbols
Start of OFF power

End of OFF power
requirement
requirement
5µs 5µs
Transient period Transient period
Figure 6.3.3.6-2: Consecutive SRS time mask for the case when no power change is required
When power change between consecutive SRS transmissions is required, then Figure 6.3.3.6-3 and Figure 6.3.3.6-4
apply.
SRS SRS SRS SRS
SRS ON power SRS ON power SRS ON power SRS ON power

requirement requirement requirement requirement
Start of OFF power
End of OFF power
requirement
requirement
5µs 5µs 5µs 5µs 5µs

Transient period Transient period Transient period Transient period Transient period
Figure 6.3.3.6-3: Consecutive SRS time mask for the case when power change is required and when
60kHz SCS is used in FR2
8.93µs
SRS SRS SRS SRS
SRS ON power 5µs SRS ON power 5µs

requirement Transient requirement Transient
period will be period will be Start of OFF power
End of OFF power requirement
taken in the taken in the
requirement
blanked SRS blanked SRS
symbol symbol
5µs
Transient period
Figure 6.3.3.6-4: Consecutive SRS time mask for the case when power change is required and when
120kHz SCS is used in FR2
ETSI
6.3.3.7 PUSCH-PUCCH and PUSCH-SRS time masks

The PUCCH/PUSCH/SRS time mask defines the observation period between sounding reference symbol (SRS) and an
adjacent PUSCH/PUCCH symbol and subsequent UL transmissions. The time masks apply for all types of frame
structures and their allowed PUCCH/PUSCH/SRS transmissions unless otherwise stated.
N0 slot N+1 slot SRS N+2 slot

Start of N+1 power
PUSCH/PUCCH
Start of N+2 power
End of N+1 power PUSCH/PUCCH
PUSCH/PUCCH
5µs 5µs
5µs
Transient period Transient period
Transient period
Figure 6.3.3.7-1: PUCCH/PUSCH/SRS time mask when there is a transmission before or after or both
before and after SRS
When there is no transmission preceding SRS transmission or succeeding SRS transmission, then the same time mask
applies as shown in Figure 6.3.3.7-1.
6.3.3.8 Transmit power time mask for consecutive slot or long subslot transmission
and short subslot transmission boundaries
The transmit power time mask for consecutive slot or long subslot transmission and short subslot transmission
boundaries defines the transient periods allowed between such transmissions.
Figure 6.3.3.8-1: Consecutive slot or long subslot transmission and short subslot transmission time
mask
6.3.3.9 Transmit power time mask for consecutive short subslot transmissions
boundaries
The transmit power time mask for consecutive short subslot transmission boundaries defines the transient periods
allowed between short subslot transmissions.
The transient period shall be equally shared as shown on Figure 6.3.3.9-2.
Figure 6.3.3.9-1: Void
ETSI
Figure 6.3.3.9-2: Consecutive short subslot transmissions time mask where DMRS is not the first
symbol in the adjacent short subslot transmission
Figure 6.3.3.9-3: Consecutive short subslot (1 symbol gap) time mask for the case when transient
period is required on both sides of the symbol and when 120 kHz SCS is used in FR2
6.3.4 Power control
6.3.4.1 General
The requirements on power control accuracy apply under normal conditions and are defined as a directional
requirement. The requirements are verified in beam locked mode on beam peak direction.
6.3.4.2 Absolute power tolerance

The absolute power tolerance is the ability of the UE transmitter to set its initial output power to a specific value for the
first sub-frame (1 ms) at the start of a contiguous transmission or non-contiguous transmission with a transmission gap
larger than 20 ms. The tolerance includes the channel estimation error RSRP estimate.
The minimum requirements specified in Table 6.3.4.2-1 apply in the power range bounded by the minimum output
power as specified in sub-clause 6.3.1 ('Pmin') and the maximum output power as specified in sub-clause 6.2.1 as
minimum peak EIRP ('Pmax'). The intermediate power point 'Pint' is defined in table 6.3.4.2-2
Table 6.3.4.2-1: Absolute power tolerance

Power Range Tolerance
Pint ≥ P ≥ Pmin ± 14.0 dB
Pmax ≥ P > Pint ± 12.0 dB
ETSI
Table 6.3.4.2-2: Intermediate power point

Power Parameter Value
Pint Pmax – 12.0 dB
6.3.4.3 Relative power tolerance

The relative power tolerance is the ability of the UE transmitter to set its output power in a target sub-frame (1 ms)
relatively to the power of the most recently transmitted reference sub-frame (1 ms) if the transmission gap between
these sub-frames is 20 ms.
The minimum requirements specified in Table 6.3.4.3-1 apply when the power of the target and reference sub-frames
are within the power range bounded by the minimum output power as defined in sub-clause 6.3.1 and Pint as defined in
sub-clause 6.3.4.2. The minimum requirements specified in Table 6.3.4.3-2 apply when the power of the target and
reference sub-frames are within the power range bounded by Pint as defined in sub-clause 6.3.4.2 and the measured
PUMAX as defined in sub-clause 6.2.4.
For a test pattern that is either a monotonically increasing or monotonically decreasing power sweep over the range
specified for Tables 6.3.4.3-1 and 6.3.4.3-2, 3 exceptions are allowed for each of the test patterns. For these exceptions,
the power tolerance limit is a maximum of ±11.0 dB.
Table 6.3.4.3-1: Relative power tolerance, Pint ≥ P ≥ Pmin

All combinations of PUSCH and
Power step ∆P (Up
PUCCH, PUSCH/PUCCH and
or down)
SRS transitions between sub-
(dB)
frames, PRACH (dB)
ΔP < 2 ±5.0
2 ≤ ΔP < 3 ±6.0
3 ≤ ΔP < 4 ±7.0
4 ≤ ΔP < 10 ±8.0
10 ≤ ΔP < 15 ±10.0
15 ≤ ΔP ±11.0
NOTE: The requirements apply with ue-
BeamLockFunction enabled.
Table 6.3.4.3-2: Relative power tolerance, PUMAX ≥ P > Pint

All combinations of PUSCH and
Power step ∆P (Up
PUCCH, PUSCH/PUCCH and
or down)
SRS transitions between sub-
(dB)
frames, PRACH (dB)
ΔP < 2 ± 3.0
2 ≤ ΔP < 3 ± 4.0
3 ≤ ΔP < 4 ± 5.0
4 ≤ ΔP < 10 ± 6.0
10 ≤ ΔP < 15 ± 8.0
15 ≤ ΔP ± 9.0
NOTE 1: The requirements apply with ue-
BeamLockFunction enabled.
NOTE 2: For PUSCH to PUSCH transitions with the
allocated resource blocks fixed in frequency and
no transmission gaps other than those generated
by downlink subframes, guard periods: for a
power step ΔP = 1 dB, the relative power
tolerance for transmission is ± 1.0 dB.
ETSI
6.3.4.4 Aggregate power tolerance

The aggregate power control tolerance is the ability of the UE transmitter to maintain its power in a sub-frame (1 ms)
during non-contiguous transmissions within 21ms in response to 0 dB TPC commands with respect to the first UE
transmission and all other power control parameters as specified in 38.213 kept constant.
The minimum requirements specified in Table 6.3.4.4-1 apply when the power of the target and reference sub-frames
are within the power range bounded by the minimum output power as defined in sub-clause 6.3.1 and Pint as defined in
sub-clause 6.3.4.2. The minimum requirements specified in Table 6.3.4.4-2 apply when the power of the target and
reference sub-frames are within the power range bounded by Pint as defined in sub-clause 6.3.4.2 and the maximum
output power as specified in sub-clause 6.2.1.
Table 6.3.4.4-1: Aggregate power tolerance, Pint ≥ P ≥ Pmin

TPC command UL channel Aggregate power tolerance
within 21 ms
0 dB PUCCH ± 5.5 dB
0 dB PUSCH ± 5.5 dB
Table 6.3.4.4-2: Aggregate power tolerance, Pmax ≥ P ≥ Pint

TPC command UL channel Aggregate power tolerance
within 21 ms
0 dB PUCCH ± 3.5 dB
0 dB PUSCH ± 3.5 dB
6.3A Output power dynamics for CA

6.3A.1 Minimum output power for CA
Table 6.3A.1-1: Void
6.3A.1.0 General
For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the minimum controlled output power of the UE is defined as the
transmit power of the UE per component carrier, i.e., EIRP in the channel bandwidth of each component carrier for all
transmit bandwidth configurations (resource blocks), when the power on both component carriers are set to a minimum
value.
6.3A.1.1 Minimum output power for power class 1

The minimum output power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.3A.1.1-1 for each operating band
supported. The minimum power is verified in beam locked mode with the test metric of EIRP (Link=TX beam peak
Table 6.3A.1.1-1: Minimum output power for power class 1

(MHz) (dBm) (MHz)
n257, n258, n260, n261 50 4 47.52
100 4 95.04
200 4 190.08
400 4 380.16
ETSI
6.3A.1.2 Minimum output power for power class 2, 3, and 4

The minimum output power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.3A.1.2-1 for each operating band
supported. The minimum power is verified in beam locked mode with the test metric of EIRP (Link=TX beam peak
Table 6.3A.1.2-1: Minimum output power for CA for power class 2, 3, and 4
(MHz) (dBm) (MHz)
n257, n258, n259, n260, 50 -13 47.52
n261 100 -13 95.04
200 -13 190.08
400 -13 380.16
NOTE 1: n260 is not applied for power class 2.
NOTE 2: n259 is not applied for power class 2 and 4.
6.3A.2 Transmit OFF power for CA

For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the transmit OFF power is defined as the TRP in the channel bandwidth
per component carrier when the transmitter is OFF. The transmitter is considered OFF when the UE is not allowed to
transmit on any of it sports.
The transmit OFF power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.3A.2-1 for each operating band supported.
Table 6.3A.2-1: Transmit OFF power for CA

Operating band Channel bandwidth / Transmit OFF power (dBm) / measurement
bandwidth
n257, n258, n259, n260, -35 -35 -35 -35
n261 47.52 MHz 95.04 MHz 190.08 MHz 380.16 MHz
6.3A.3 Transmit ON/OFF time mask for CA

For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the general output power ON/OFF time mask specified in clause 6.3.3.2
is applicable for each component carrier during the ON power period and the transient periods. The OFF period as
specified in clause 6.3.3.2 shall only be applicable for each component carrier when all the component carriers are OFF.
6.3A.4 Power control for CA
6.3A.4.1 General
The requirements in this clause apply to a UE when it has at least one of UL or DL configured for CA operation. The
requirements on power control accuracy in CA operation apply under normal conditions and are defined as a directional
requirement. The requirements are verified in beam locked mode on beam peak direction. The requirements apply for
one single PUCCH, PUSCH or SRS transmission of contiguous PRB allocation per configured UL CC with power
setting in accordance with Clause 7.1 of [10]
6.3A.4.2 Absolute power tolerance

The absolute power tolerance is the ability of the UE transmitter to set its initial output power to a specific value for the
first sub-frame at the start of a contiguous transmission or non-contiguous transmission with a transmission gap on each
active component carriers larger than 20 ms. For SRS switching, the absolute power tolerance is the ability of the UE
transmitter to set its initial output power to a specific value for the first sub-frame at the start of a contiguous
transmission or non-contiguous transmission with a transmission gap on component carriers (to which SRS switching
occurs) larger than 20 ms. The requirement can be tested by time aligning any transmission gaps on the component
ETSI
carriers. For intra-band contiguous CA, the absolute power control tolerance per configured UL CC is given in Tables
6.3.4.2-1 and 6.3.4.2-2.
6.3A.4.3 Relative power tolerance

The relative power tolerance is the ability of the UE transmitter to set its output power in a target sub-frame relative to
the power of the most recently transmitted reference sub-frame if the transmission gap between these sub-frames is
<20ms.
For intra-band contiguous CA, the requirements apply when the power of the target and reference sub-frames on each
component carrier exceed the minimum output power as defined in clause 6.3A.1 and the total power is limited by
PUMAX as defined in clause 6.2A.4. For the purpose of these requirements, the power in each component carrier is
specified over only the transmitted resource blocks. The UE shall meet the requirements in tables 6.3.4.3-1 and 6.3.4.3-
2 for transmission on each assigned component carrier, when the average PSDs over each CC are aligned with each
other in the reference sub-frame. The requirements apply per component carrier to:
a. All possible combinations of PUSCH and PUCCH transitions
b. SRS and PUSCH/PUCCH transitions, only with simultaneous SRS of constant SRS bandwidth allocated in the
target and reference subrames
c. RACH, primary component carrier
When applicable, the power step ΔP between the reference and target subframes shall be set by a TPC command and/or
an uplink scheduling grant transmitted by means of an appropriate DCI Format.
6.3A.4.4 Aggregate power tolerance

The aggregate power control tolerance is the ability of the UE transmitter to maintain its power during non-contiguous
transmissions within 21 ms in response to 0 dB TPC commands with respect to the first UE transmission and all other
power control parameters as specified in [10] kept constant.
For intra-band contiguous CA, the aggregate power tolerance per CC is given in Tables 6.3.4.4.1-1 and 6.3.4.4.1-2, with
simultaneous PUSCH configured. The average PSDs over each assigned CC shall be aligned before the start of the test.
The requirement can be tested with the transmission gaps time aligned between component carriers.
6.3D Output power dynamics for UL MIMO

6.3D.1 Minimum output power for UL MIMO
6.3D.1.1 Minimum output power for UL MIMO for power class 1

For UE supporting UL MIMO, the minimum controlled output power is defined as the EIRP, i.e. the sum of the power
in the channel bandwidth for all transmit bandwidth configurations (resource blocks), when the UE power is set to a
minimum value. The minimum output power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.3.1.1-1. The minimum
power is verified in beam locked mode with the test metric of EIRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
6.3D.1.2 Minimum output power for UL MIMO for power class 2, 3 and 4
For UE supporting UL MIMO, the minimum controlled output power is defined as the EIRP, i.e. the sum of the power
in the channel bandwidth for all transmit bandwidth configurations (resource blocks), when the UE power is set to a
minimum value. The minimum output power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.3.1.2-1. The minimum
power is verified in beam locked mode with the test metric of EIRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
6.3D.2 Transmit OFF power for UL MIMO

For UE supporting UL MIMO, the transmit OFF power is defined as the TRP in the channel bandwidth when the
transmitter is OFF. The transmitter is considered OFF when the UE is not allowed to transmit on any of its ports.
During DTX and measurements gaps, the transmitter is not considered OFF. The minimum output power shall not
ETSI
exceed the values specified in Table 6.3.2-1. The requirement is verified with the test metric of TRP (Link=TX beam
peak direction, Meas=TRP grid).
6.3D.3 Transmit ON/OFF time mask for UL MIMO

For UE supporting UL MIMO, the ON/OFF time mask requirements in clause 6.3.3 apply. The requirements shall be
met with the UL MIMO configurations specified in Table 6.2D.1.3-3.
6.4 Transmit signal quality

6.4.1 Frequency Error
The UE basic measurement interval of modulated carrier frequency is 1 UL slot. The mean value of basic measurements
of UE modulated carrier frequency shall be accurate to within ± 0.1 PPM observed over a period of 1 msec of
cumulated measurement intevals compared to the carrier frequency received from the NR gNB.
The frequency error is defined as a directional requirement. The requirement is verified in beam locked mode with the
test metric of Frequency (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
6.4.2 Transmit modulation quality
6.4.2.0 General
Transmit modulation quality defines the modulation quality for expected in-channel RF transmissions from the UE. The
transmit modulation quality is specified in terms of:
- Error Vector Magnitude (EVM) for the allocated resource blocks (RBs)
- EVM equalizer spectrum flatness derived from the equalizer coefficients generated by the EVM measurement
process
- Carrier leakage
- In-band emissions for the non-allocated RB
All the parameters defined in clause 6.4.2 are defined using the measurement methodology specified in Annex F.
All the requirements in 6.4.2 are defined as directional requirement. The requirements are verified in beam locked mode
on beam peak direction, with parameter maxRank (as defined in TS 38.331 [13]) set to 1. The requirements are
applicable to UL transmission from each configurable antenna port (as defined in TS 38.331 [13]) of UE, enabled one at
a time.
In case the parameter 3300 or 3301 is reported from UE via txDirectCurrentLocation IE (as defined in TS 38.331 [13]),
carrier leakage measurement requirement in clause 6.4.2.2 and 6.4.2.3 shall be waived, and the RF correction with
regard to the carrier leakage and IQ image shall be omitted during the calculation of transmit modulation quality.
6.4.2.1 Error vector magnitude

The Error Vector Magnitude is a measure of the difference between the reference waveform and the measured
waveform. This difference is called the error vector. Before calculating the EVM, the measured waveform is corrected
by the sample timing offset and RF frequency offset. Then the carrier leakage shall be removed from the measured
waveform before calculating the EVM.
The measured waveform is further equalised using the channel estimates subjected to the EVM equaliser spectrum
flatness requirement specified in sub-clauses 6.4.2.4 and 6.4.2.5. For DFT-s-OFDM waveforms, the EVM result is
defined after the front-end FFT and IDFT as the square root of the ratio of the mean error vector power to the mean
reference power expressed as a %. For CP-OFDM waveforms, the EVM result is defined after the front-end FFT as the
square root of the ratio of the mean error vector power to the mean reference power expressed as a %.
ETSI
The basic EVM measurement interval in the time domain is one preamble sequence for the PRACH and one slot for
PUCCH and PUSCH in the time domain. The EVM measurement interval is reduced by any symbols that contains an
allowable power transient in the measurement interval as as defined in clause 6.3.3.
The RMS average of the basic EVM measurements over 10 subframes for the average EVM case, and over 60
subframes for the reference signal EVM case, for the different modulation schemes shall not exceed the values specified
in Table 6.4.2.1-1 for the parameters defined in Table 6.4.2.1-2 or 6.4.2.1-3, depending on UE power class. For EVM
evaluation purposes, all 13 PRACH preamble formats and all 5 PUCCH formats are considered to have the same EVM
requirement as QPSK modulated.
The requirement is verified with the test metric of EVM (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
Table 6.4.2.1-1: Minimum requirements for error vector magnitude

Parameter Unit Average EVM level Reference signal EVM level
Pi/2 BPSK % 30.0 30.0
QPSK % 17.5 17.5
16 QAM % 12.5 12.5
64 QAM % 8.0 8.0
Table 6.4.2.1-2: Parameters for Error Vector Magnitude for power class 1
Parameter Unit Level
UE EIRP dBm ≥4
UE EIRP for UL 16 QAM dBm ≥7
UE EIRP for UL 64 QAM dBm ≥ 11
Operating conditions Normal conditions
Table 6.4.2.1-3: Parameters for Error Vector Magnitude for power class 2, 3, and 4
Parameter Unit Level

UE EIRP dBm ≥ -13
UE EIRP for UL 16 QAM dBm ≥ -10
UE EIRP for UL 64 QAM dBm ≥ -6
Operating conditions Normal conditions
6.4.2.2 Carrier leakage
6.4.2.2.1 General
Carrier leakage is an additive sinusoid waveform. The carrier leakage requirement is defined for each component
carrier. The measurement interval is one slot in the time domain. The relative carrier leakage power is a power ratio of
the additive sinusoid waveform to the power in the modulated waveform.
The requirement is verified with the test metric of Carrier Leakage (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
6.4.2.2.2 Carrier leakage for power class 1

When carrier leakage is contained inside the spectrum confined within the configured UL and DL CCs, the relative
carrier leakage power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.4.2.2.2-1 for power class 1 UEs.
Table 6.4.2.2.2-1: Minimum requirements for relative carrier leakage power for power class 1
Parameters Relative Limit (dBc)
EIRP > 17 dBm -25
4 dBm ≤ EIRP ≤ 17 dBm -20
ETSI

When carrier leakage is contained inside the spectrum occupied by the configured UL CCs and DL CCs, the relative
carrier leakage power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.4.2.2.3-1 for power class 2.

EIRP > 6 dBm -25
-13 dBm ≤ EIRP ≤ 6 dBm -20

carrier leakage power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.4.2.2.4-1 for power class 3 UEs.
EIRP > 0 dBm -25
-13 dBm ≤ EIRP ≤ 0 dBm -20

carrier leakage power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.4.2.2.5-1 for power class 4.

EIRP > 11 dBm -25
-13 dBm ≤ EIRP ≤ 11 dBm -20
6.4.2.3 In-band emissions
6.4.2.3.1 General
The in-band emission is defined as the average across 12 sub-carriers and as a function of the RB offset from the edge
of the allocated UL transmission bandwidth. The in-band emission is measured as the ratio of the UE output power in a
non–allocated RB to the UE output power in an allocated RB.
The basic in-band emissions measurement interval is identical to that of the EVM test.
The requirement is verified with the test metric of In-band emission (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
6.4.2.3.2 In-band emissions for power class 1

The average of the in-band emission measurement over 10 sub-frames shall not exceed the values specified in Table
6.4.2.3.2-1 for power class 1 UEs.
ETSI
Table 6.4.2.3.2-1: Requirements for in-band emissions for power class 1

Parameter Applicable
Unit Limit (NOTE 1)
description Frequencies
⎡ −25 − 10. logଵ଴ LNோ஻ , ⎤
⎢ ஼ோ஻ ⎥
General dB
⎢⎢20. log EVM − 5. |∆ோ஻ |−1 ⎥
,⎥ Any non-allocated
⎢ ଵ଴
L஼ோ஻ ⎥ (NOTE 2)
⎣ −55.1 −
ோ஻ ⎦
-25 Output power > 27 dBm Image frequencies
IQ Image dB
-20 Output power ≤ 27 dBm (NOTES 2, 3)
Carrier -25 Output power > 17 dBm Carrier frequency
dBc
leakage -20 4 dBm ≤ Output power ≤ 17 dBm (NOTES 4, 5)
NOTE 1: An in-band emissions combined limit is evaluated in each non-allocated RB. For each such RB, the minimum
requirement is calculated as the higher of (PRB - 25 dB) and the power sum of all limit values (General, IQ Image or
Carrier leakage) that apply. PRB is defined in NOTE 10.
NOTE 2: The measurement bandwidth is 1 RB and the limit is expressed as a ratio of measured power in one non-allocated
RB to the measured average power per allocated RB, where the averaging is done across all allocated RBs. For
pi/2 BPSK with Spectrum Shaping, the limit is expressed as a ratio of measured power in one non-allocated RB to
the measured power in the allocated RB with highest PSD
NOTE 3: The applicable frequencies for this limit are those that are enclosed in the reflection of the allocated bandwidth,
based on symmetry with respect to the carrier frequency, but excluding any allocated RBs.
RB to the measured total power in all allocated RBs.
NOTE 5: The applicable frequencies for this limit depend on the parameter txDirectCurrentLocation in
UplinkTxDirectCurrent IE, and are those that are enclosed in the RBs containing the DC frequency but excluding
any allocated RB.
NOTE 6: LCRB is the Transmission Bandwidth (see Clause 5.3).
NOTE 7: NRB is the Transmission Bandwidth Configuration (see Clause 5.3).
NOTE 8: EVM s the limit for the modulation format used in the allocated RBs.
NOTE 9: ΔRB is the starting frequency offset between the allocated RB and the measured non-allocated RB (e.g. ΔRB = 1 or
ΔRB = -1 for the first adjacent RB outside of the allocated bandwidth).
NOTE 10: P RB is an average of the transmitted power over 10 sub-frames normalized by the number of allocated RBs,
measured in dBm.
NOTE 11: All powers are EIRP in beam peak direction.

6.4.2.3.3-1 for power class 2.

Unit Limit (NOTE 1)
⎡ −25 − 10. logଵ଴ LNோ஻ , ⎤
⎢ ஼ோ஻ ⎥
General dB
⎢⎢20. log EVM − 5. |∆ோ஻ |−1 ⎥
,⎥ Any non-allocated
⎢ ଵ଴
⎣ −55.1 −
ோ஻ ⎦
IQ Image dB
dBc
leakage -20 -13 dBm ≤ Output power ≤ 6 dBm (NOTES 4, 5)
ETSI
Pi/2 BPSK with Spectrum Shaping, the limit is expressed as a ratio of measured power in one non-allocated RB to
any allocated RB.
measured in dBm.

ETSI

Unit Limit (NOTE 1)
⎡ −25 − 10. logଵ଴ LNோ஻ , ⎤

⎢ ஼ோ஻ ⎥
General dB ⎢⎢20. log EVM − 5. |∆ோ஻ |−1 ⎥
,⎥
Any non-allocated
⎢ ଵ଴
⎣ −55.1 −
ோ஻ ⎦
IQ Image dB
dBc
any allocated RB.
measured in dBm.

ETSI

Unit Limit (NOTE 1)
⎡ −25 − 10. logଵ଴ LNோ஻ , ⎤

⎢ ஼ோ஻ ⎥
General dB ⎢⎢20. log EVM − 5. |∆ோ஻ |−1 ⎥
,⎥
Any non-allocated
⎢ ଵ଴
⎣ −55.1 −
ோ஻ ⎦
IQ Image dB
dBc
any allocated RB.
measured in dBm.
6.4.2.4 EVM equalizer spectrum flatness

The EVM measurement process (as described in Annex F) entails generation of a zero-forcing equalizer. The EVM
equalizer spectrum flatness is defined in terms of the maximum peak-to-peak ripple of the equalizer coefficients (dB)
across the allocated uplink block. The basic measurement interval is the same as for EVM.
For Pi/2 BPSK modulation, the minimum requirements are defined in Clause 6.4.2.5.
The peak-to-peak variation of the EVM equalizer coefficients contained within the frequency range of the uplink
allocation shall not exceed the maximum ripple specified in Table 6.4.2.4-1 for normal conditions. For uplink
allocations contained within both Range 1 and Range 2, the coefficients evaluated within each of these frequency
ranges shall meet the corresponding ripple requirement and the following additional requirements: the relative
difference between the maximum coefficient in Range 1 and the minimum coefficient in Range 2 (Table 6.4.2.4-1) must
not be larger than 7 dB, and the relative difference between the maximum coefficient in Range 2 and the minimum
coefficient in Range 1 must not be larger than 8 dB (see Figure 6.4.2.4-1).
The requirement is verified with the test metric of EVM SF (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
ETSI
Table 6.4.2.4-1: Minimum requirements for EVM equalizer spectrum flatness (normal conditions)
Frequency range Maximum ripple (dB)
|FUL_Meas – F_center| ≤ X MHz 6 (p-p)
(Range 1)
|FUL_Meas – F_center| > X MHz 9 (p-p)
(Range 2)
NOTE 1: FUL_Meas refers to the sub-carrier frequency for which the equalizer coefficient is
evaluated
NOTE 2: F_center refers to the center frequency of the CC
NOTE 3: X, in MHz, is equal to 30 % of the CC bandwidth
Table 6.4.2.4-2: (Void)
max(Range 2) – min(Range 1) < 8 dB

< 9 dB p-p
< 6 dB p-p
max(Range 1) – min(Range 2) < 7 dB
Range 1 Range 2
|FUL_Meas – F_center|
0 X
Figure 6.4.2.4-1: The limits for EVM equalizer spectral flatness with the maximum allowed variation of
the coefficients indicated under normal conditions
6.4.2.5 EVM spectral flatness for Pi/2 BPSK modulation

These requirements are defined for Pi/2 BPSK modulation. The EVM equalizer coefficients across the allocated uplink
block shall be modified to fit inside the mask specified in Table 6.4.2.5-1 for normal conditions, prior to the calculation
of EVM. The limiting mask shall be placed to minimize the change in equalizer coefficients in a sum of squares sense.
Table 6.4.2.5-1: Mask for EVM equalizer coefficients for pi/2 BPSK (normal conditions)
Frequency range Parameter Maximum ripple (dB)
|FUL_Meas – F_center| ≤ X MHz X1 6 (p-p)
(Range 1)
|FUL_Meas – F_center| > X MHz X2 14 (p-p)
(Range 2)
NOTE 1: FUL_Meas refers to the sub-carrier frequency for which the equalizer coefficient is evaluated
NOTE 2: F_center refers to the center frequency of an allocated block of PRBs
NOTE 3: X, in MHz, is equal to 25% of the bandwidth of the PRB allocation
NOTE 4: See Figure 6.4.2.5-1 for description of X1, X2 and X3
ETSI
X2 = X1 + X3
X3
X2
X1
Range 1 Range 2
|FUL_Meas – F_center|
0 X
Figure 6.4.2.5-1: The limits for EVM equalizer spectral flatness with the maximum allowed variation.
F_center denotes the center frequency of the allocated block of PRBs.
This requirement does not apply to other modulation types. The UE shall be allowed to employ spectral shaping for Pi/2
BPSK. The shaping filter shall be restricted so that the impulse response of the transmit chain shall meet
│ãt(t,0)│ ≥ │ãt(t, τ)│ ∀τ ≠ 0

20log10│ãt(t,τ)│< -15 dB 1< τ < M - 1,
Where:
│ãt(t,τ)│=IDFT{│ãt(t,f)│ejφ (t,f)} ,
f is the frequency of the M allocated subcarriers,
ã(t,f) and φ(t,f) are the amplitude and phase response, respectively of the transmit chain
0dB reference is defined as 20log10│ãt(t,0)│
6.4A Transmit signal quality for CA

The requirements in this clause apply if the UE has at least one of UL or DL configured for CA.
6.4A.1 Frequency error

The requirements in this clause apply to UEs of all power classes.
For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the UE basic measurement interval of modulated carrier frequency is 1
UL slot. The mean value of basic measurements of UE modulated carrier frequencies per band shall be accurate to
within ± 0.1 PPM observed over a period of 1ms of cumulated measurement intevals compared to the carrier frequency
of primary component carrier received from the gNB.
The frequency error is defined as a directional requirement. The requirement is verified in beam locked mode on beam
peak direction.
6.4A.2 Transmit modulation quality
6.4A.2.0 General
For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the requirements in clauses 6.4A.2.1, 6.4A.2.2, and 6.4A.2.3.
All the parameters defined in clause 6.4A.2 are defined using the measurement methodology specified in Annex F.
All the requirements in 6.4A.2 are defined as directional requirement. The requirements are verified in beam locked
mode on beam peak direction, with both UL polarizations active.
ETSI
6.4A.2.1 Error Vector magnitude

The requirements in this clause apply to UEs of all power classes. For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the
Error Vector Magnitude requirement of clause 6.4.2.2 is defined for each component carrier. Requirements only apply
with PRB allocation in one of the component carriers. Similar transmitter impairment removal procedures are applied
for CA waveform before EVM calculation as is specified for non-CA waveform.
carrier leakage measurement requirement in clause 6.4A.2.2 and 6.4A.2.3 shall be waived, and the RF correction with
The UE is defined to be configured for CA operation when it has at least one of UL or DL configured for CA.
6.4A.2.2 Carrier leakage
6.4A.2.2.1 General
Carrier leakage is an additive sinusoid waveform. The carrier leakage requirement is defined for each component carrier
and is measured on the component carrier with PRBs allocated. The measurement interval is one slot in the time
domain.
Note: When UE has DL configured for non-contiguous CA, carrier leakage may land outside the spectrum
occupied by all configured UL and DL CC.
The relative carrier leakage power is a power ratio of the additive sinusoid waveform and the modulated waveform. The
requirement is verified with the test metric of Carrier Leakage (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
6.4A.2.2.2 Carrier leakage for power class 1

When carrier leakage is contained inside the spectrum occupied by all configured UL and DL CCs, the relative carrier
leakage power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.4A.2.2.2-1 for power class 1 UEs.
Table 6.4A.2.2.2-1: Minimum requirements for relative carrier leakage for power class 1
EIRP > 17 dBm -25
4 dBm ≤ EIRP ≤ 17 dBm -20

leakage power shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.4A.2.2.3-1 for power class 2.
Table 6.4A.2.2.3-1: Minimum requirements for relative carrier leakage power class 2
Parameters Relative limit (dBc)

EIRP > 6 dBm -25
-13 dBm ≤ EIRP ≤ 6 dBm -20

ETSI
Output power > 0 dBm -25
-13 dBm ≤ Output
-20
power EIRP ≤ 0 dBm

Output power > 11 dBm -25
-13 dBm ≤ Output
-20
power EIRP ≤ 11 dBm
6.4A.2.3 Inband emissions
6.4A.2.3.1 General
Inband emission requirement is defined over the spectrum occupied by all configured UL and DL CCs. The
measurement interval is as defined in clause 6.4.2.4. The requirement is verified with the test metric of In-band
emission (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the requirements in this clause apply with all component carriers active
and with one single contiguous PRB allocation in one of uplink component carriers. The inband emission is defined as
the interference falling into the non-allocated resource blocks for all component carriers.
6.4A.2.3.2 Inband emissions for power class 1

The relative in-band emission shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.4A.2.3.2-1 for power class 1 UEs.
Table 6.4A.2.3.2-1: Requirements for in-band emissionsfor power class 1

Unit Limit (NOTE 1)
⎡ −25 − 10 ∙ logଵ଴ LNோ஻ , ⎤ Any non-allocated
⎢ ஼ோ஻ ⎥ RB in allocated
General dB
⎢⎢20 ∙ log EVM − 5 ∙ |∆ோ஻ |−1 ⎥
,⎥ component carrier
⎢ ଵ଴
L஼ோ஻ ⎥ and not allocated
⎣ −55.1 − ோ஻ ⎦ component carriers
(NOTE 2)
IQ Image dB
dBc
leakage -20 4 dBm ≤ Output power ≤ 17 dBm (NOTES 4, 5)
ETSI
the measured power in the allocated RB with highest PSD.
NOTE 3: Image frequencies for UL CA are specified in relation to either UL or DL carrier frequency.
NOTE 5: The applicable frequencies for this limit are those that are enclosed in the RBs containing the DC frequency, or in
the two RBs immediately adjacent to the DC frequency but excluding any allocated RB.
NOTE 6: L஼ோ஻ is the Transmission Bandwidth for kth allocated component carrier (see Figure 5.3.3-1).
NOTE 8: ∆ோ஻ is the starting frequency offset between the allocated RB and the measured non-allocated RB (e.g. ∆ோ஻ = 1 or
∆ோ஻ = -1 for the first adjacent RB outside of the allocated bandwidth), and may take non-integer values when the
carrier spacing between the CCs is not a multiple of RB.
NOTE 9: PRB is the transmitted power per allocated RB, measured in dBm.

The relative in-band emission shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.4A.2.3.3-1 for power class 2.
Table 6.4A.2.3.3-1: Requirements for in-band emissions for power class 2

Unit Limit (NOTE 1)
General dB
⎢⎢20 ∙ log EVM − 5 ∙ |∆ோ஻ |−1 ⎥
⎢ ଵ଴
(NOTE 2)
IQ Image dB
dBc

ETSI

Unit Limit (NOTE 1)
General dB
⎢⎢20 ∙ log EVM − 5 ∙ |∆ோ஻ |−1 ⎥
⎢ ଵ଴
(NOTE 2)
IQ Image dB
dBc


Unit Limit (NOTE 1)
General dB
⎢⎢20 ∙ log EVM − 5 ∙ |∆ோ஻ |−1 ⎥
⎢ ଵ଴
(NOTE 2)
IQ Image dB
dBc
ETSI
pi/2 BPSK with Spectrum Shaping, the limit is expressed as a ratio of measured power in one non-allocated RB to
6.4A.2.4 EVM equalizer spectrum flatness
6.4D Transmit signal quality for UL MIMO

6.4D.0 General
For a UE supporting UL MIMO, the transmit modulation quality requirements in clause 6.4 apply. The requirements
apply when the UE is configured for 2-layer UL MIMO transmission as specified in Table 6.2D.1.3-3.
The requirement may alternatively be verified in each of the single layer UL MIMO configurations as specified in Table
6.4D.0-1.
Table 6.4D.0-1: Alternative UL MIMO configuration for transmit signal quality tests
6.4D.1 Frequency error for UL MIMO

For a UE supporting UL MIMO, the UE basic measurement interval of modulated carrier frequency is 1 UL slot. The
mean value of basic measurements of UE modulated carrier frequency at each layer shall be accurate to within ± 0.1
PPM observed over a period of 1ms of cumulated measurement intevals compared to the carrier frequency received
from the NR Node B.
6.4D.2 Transmit modulation quality for UL MIMO

For UE supporting UL MIMO, the transmit modulation quality requirements are specified at each layer separately.
The transmit modulation quality requirements are specified in terms of:
Error Vector Magnitude (EVM) for the allocated resource blocks (RBs)
EVM equalizer spectrum flatness derived from the equalizer coefficients generated by the EVM measurement
process
Carrier leakage (caused by IQ offset)
In-band emissions for the non-allocated RB
ETSI
carrier leakage measurement requirement in clause 6.4D.2.2 and 6.4D.2.3 shall be waived, and the RF correction with
6.4D.3 Time alignment error for UL MIMO

For a UE with multiple physical antenna ports supporting UL MIMO, this requirement applies to frame timing
differences between transmissions on multiple physical antenna ports in the codebook transmission scheme.
The time alignment error (TAE) is defined as the average frame timing difference between any two transmissions on
different physical antenna ports.
For a UE with multiple physical antenna ports, the Time Alignment Error (TAE) shall not exceed 130 ns.
6.4D.4 Requirements for coherent UL MIMO

For coherent UL MIMO, Table 6.4D.4-1 lists the maximum allowable difference between the measured relative power
and phase errors between different physical antenna ports in any slot within the specified time window from the last
transmitted SRS on the same antenna ports, for the purpose of uplink transmission (codebook or non-codebook usage)
and those measured at that last SRS. The requirements in Table 6.4D.4-1 apply when the UL transmission power at
each physical antenna port is larger than 0 dBm for SRS transmission and for the duration of time window. The
requirement is verified with the test metric of EIRP (Link=TX Beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
Table 6.4D.4-1: Maximum allowable difference of relative phase and power errors in a given slot
compared to those measured at last SRS transmitted
Difference of relative power

Difference of relative phase error Time window
error
40 degrees 4 dB 20 msec
The above requirements apply when all of the following conditions are met within the specified time window:
- UE is not signaled with a change in number of SRS ports in SRS-config, or a change in PUSCH-config
- UE remains in DRX active time (UE does not enter DRX OFF time)
- No measurement gap occurs
- No instance of SRS transmission with the usage antenna switching occurs
- Active BWP remains the same
- EN-DC and CA configuration is not changed for the UE (UE is not configured or de-configured with PScell or
SCell(s))
6.5 Output RF spectrum emissions

6.5.1 Occupied bandwidth
Occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth containing 99 % of the total integrated mean power of the transmitted
spectrum on the assigned channel. The occupied bandwidth for all transmission bandwidth configurations (Resources
Blocks) shall be less than the channel bandwidth specified in Table 6.5.1-1.
The occupied bandwidth is defined as a directional requirement. The requirement is verified in beam locked mode with
the test metric of OBW (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
ETSI
Table 6.5.1-1: Occupied channel bandwidth

Occupied channel bandwidth / Channel bandwidth
50 100 200 400
MHz MHz MHz MHz
Channel bandwidth
50 100 200 400
(MHz)
6.5.2 Out of band emissions
6.5.2.0 General
The Out of band emissions are unwanted emissions immediately outside the assigned channel bandwidth resulting from
the modulation process and non-linearity in the transmitter but excluding spurious emissions. This out of band emission
limit is specified in terms of a spectrum emission mask and an adjacent channel leakage power ratio. Additional
requirements to protect specific bands are also considered.
The requirements in clause 6.5.2.1 only apply when both UL and DL of a UE are configured for single CC operation,
and they are of the same bandwidth. For a UE that is configured for single CC operation with different channel
bandwidths in UL and DL, the requirements in clause 6.5A.2.1 apply.
All out of band emissions for frequency range 2 are TRP.
6.5.2.1 Spectrum emission mask

The spectrum emission mask of the UE applies to frequencies (ΔfOOB) starting from the ± edge of the assigned NR
channel bandwidth. For frequencies offset greater than FOOB as specified in Table 6.5.2.1-1 the spurious requirements in
clause 6.5.3 are applicable.
The power of any UE emission shall not exceed the levels specified in Table 6.5.2.1-1 for the specified channel
bandwidth. The requirement is verified in beam locked mode with the test metric of TRP (Link=TX beam peak
direction, Meas=TRP grid).
Table 6.5.2.1-1: General NR spectrum emission mask for frequency range 2.

Spectrum emission limit (dBm) / Channel bandwidth
ΔfOOB 50 100 200 400 Measurement
(MHz) MHz MHz MHz MHz bandwidth
± 0-5 -5 -5 -5 -5 1 MHz
± 5-10 -13 -5 -5 -5 1 MHz
± 10-20 -13 -13 -5 -5 1 MHz
± 20-40 -13 -13 -13 -5 1 MHz
± 40-100 -13 -13 -13 -13 1 MHz
± 100-200 -13 -13 -13 1 MHz
± 200-400 -13 -13 1 MHz
± 400-800 -13 1 MHz
NOTE 1: Void
6.5.2.2 Void
.
6.5.2.3 Adjacent channel leakage ratio

Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR) is the ratio of the filtered mean power centred on the assigned channel
frequency to the filtered mean power centred on an adjacent channel frequency. ACLR requirement is specified for a
scenario in which adjacent carrier is another NR channel.
NR Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (NRACLR) is the ratio of the filtered mean power centred on the assigned
channel frequency to the filtered mean power centred on an adjacent channel frequency at nominal channel spacing. The
ETSI
assigned NR channel power and adjacent NR channel power are measured with rectangular filters with measurement
bandwidths specified in Table 6.5.2.3-1.
If the measured adjacent channel power is greater than –35 dBm then the NRACLR shall be higher than the value specified
in Table 6.5.2.3-1. The requirement is verified in beam locked mode with the test metric of TRP (Link=TX beam peak
direction, Meas=TRP grid).
Table 6.5.2.3-1: General requirements for NRACLR

Channel bandwidth / NRACLR / Measurement bandwidth
50 100 200 400
MHz MHz MHz MHz
NRACLR for band n257,
17 dB 17 dB 17 dB 17 dB
n258, n261
NRACLR for band n259,
16 dB 16 dB 16 dB 16 dB
n260
NR channel measurement
47.58 95.16 190.20 380.28
bandwidth (MHz)
+50 +100 +200 +400
Adjacent channel centre
/ / / /
frequency offset (MHz)
-50 -100 -200 -400
6.5.3 Spurious emissions

Spurious emissions are emissions which are caused by unwanted transmitter effects such as harmonics emission,
parasitic emissions, intermodulation products and frequency conversion products, but exclude out of band emissions
unless otherwise stated. The spurious emission limits are specified in terms of general requirements in line with SM.329
[7] and NR operating band requirement to address UE co-existence. Spurious emissions are measured as TRP.
To improve measurement accuracy, sensitivity and efficiency, the resolution bandwidth may be smaller than the
measurement bandwidth. When the resolution bandwidth is smaller than the measurement bandwidth, the result should
be integrated over the measurement bandwidth in order to obtain the equivalent noise bandwidth of the measurement
bandwidth.
Unless otherwise stated, the spurious emission limits apply for the frequency ranges that are more than FOOB (MHz) in
Table 6.5.3-1 starting from the edge of the assigned NR channel bandwidth. The spurious emission limits in Table
6.5.3-2 apply for all transmitter band configurations (NRB) and channel bandwidths. The requirement is verified in
beam locked mode with the test metric of TRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=TRP grid).
NOTE: For measurement conditions at the edge of each frequency range, the lowest frequency of the
measurement position in each frequency range should be set at the lowest boundary of the frequency
range plus MBW/2. The highest frequency of the measurement position in each frequency range should
be set at the highest boundary of the frequency range minus MBW/2. MBW denotes the measurement
bandwidth defined for the protected band.
Table 6.5.3-1: Boundary between NR out of band and spurious emission domain
Channel bandwidth 50 100 200 400
MHz MHz MHz MHz
OOB boundary FOOB
(MHz) 100 200 400 800
ETSI
Table 6.5.3-2: Spurious emissions limits

Frequency Range Maximum Measurement
Level bandwidth
30 MHz ≤ f < 1000 MHz -36 dBm 100 kHz
1 GHz ≤ f < 12.75 GHz -30 dBm 1 MHz
12.75 GHz ≤ f ≤ 2nd
harmonic of the upper
frequency edge of the -13 dBm 1 MHz
UL operating band in
GHz
6.5.3.1 Spurious emission band UE co-existence

This clause specifies the requirements for the specified NR band, for coexistence with protected bands.
Table 6.5.3.1-1: Requirements

Spurious emission
NR Band Protected band/frequency range Frequency range Maximum MBW (MHz)
(MHz) Level (dBm)
NR Band n260 FDL_low - FDL_high -2 100
n257
Frequency range 57000 - 66000 2 100
n258 Frequency range 57000 - 66000 2 100
NR Band 257 FDL_low - FDL_high -5 100
n259
Frequency range 36000 - 37000 7 1000
n260 NR Band 261 FDL_low - FDL_high -5 100
n261
NOTE 1: FDL_low and FDL_high refer to each NR frequency band specified in Table 5.2-1
NOTE 2: Void
6.5.3.2 Additional spurious emissions
6.5.3.2.1 General
These requirements are specified in terms of an additional spectrum emission requirement. Additional spurious
emission requirements are signalled by the network to indicate that the UE shall meet an additional requirement for
a specific deployment scenario as part of the cell handover/broadcast message.
6.5.3.2.2 Additional spurious emission requirements for NS_201

When "NS_201" is indicated in the cell, the power of any UE emission shall not exceed the levels specified in Table
6.5.3.2.2-1. This requirement also applies for the frequency ranges that are less than FOOB (MHz) in Table 6.5.3-1 from
the edge of the channel bandwidth.
ETSI
Table 6.5.3.2.2-1: Additional requirements (NS_201)

Frequency band Channel bandwidth / Spectrum emission limit Measurement NOTE
(GHz) (dBm) bandwidth
50 100 200 400
MHz MHz MHz MHz
23.6 ≤ f ≤ 24 -8 -8 -8 -8 200 MHz 1
NOTE 1: The protection of frequency range 23600 - 24000 MHz is meant for protection of satellite passive services.
6.5.3.2.3 Additional spurious emission requirements for NS_202

When "NS_202" is indicated in the cell, the power of any UE emission shall not exceed the levels specified in
Table 6.5.3.2.3-1.
Table 6.5.3.2.3-1: Additional requirements (NS_202)

Frequency Range Maximum Measurement
Level bandwidth
7.25 GHz ≤ f ≤ 2nd
harmonic of the upper
-10 dBm 100 MHz
frequency edge of the
UL operating band
23.6 GHz ≤ f ≤ 24.0
+1 dBm 200 MHz
GHz
6.5A Output RF spectrum emissions for CA

6.5A.1 Occupied bandwidth for CA
For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the occupied bandwidth is a measure of the bandwidth containing 99 %
of the total integrated power of the transmitted spectrum. The occupied bandwidth for CA shall be less than the
aggregated channel bandwidth defined in clause 5.3A.
The occupied bandwidth for CA is defined as a directional requirement. The requirement is verified in beam locked
mode on beam peak direction.
6.5A.2 Out of band emissions
6.5A.2.1 Spectrum emission mask for CA

The requirement specified in this clause shall apply if the UE has at least one of UL or DL configured for CA or if the
UE is configured for single CC operation with different channel bandwidths in UL and DL carriers.
For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the spectrum emission mask of the UE applies to frequencies (ΔfOOB)
starting from the ± edge of the aggregated channel bandwidth (Table 5.3A.5-1). For any bandwidth class defined in
Table 5.3A.5-1, the UE emission shall not exceed the levels specified in Table 6.5A.2.1-1. The requirement is verified
in beam locked mode with the test metric of TRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=TRP grid).
ETSI
Table 6.5A.2.1-1: General NR spectrum emission mask for intra-band contiguous CA in frequency
range 2
ΔfOOB Any carrier aggregation Measurement
(MHz) bandwidth class bandwidth
± 0-0.1*BW Channel_CA -5 1 MHz
± 0.1*BW Channel_CA - -13 1 MHz
2*BW Channel_CA
NOTE 1: If carrier leakage or I/Q image lands inside the spectrum occupied by the
configured UL and DL CCs, exception to the general spectrum emission mask limit
applies. For carrier leakage the requirements specified in clause 6.4A.2.2 shall
apply. For I/Q image the requirements specified in clause 6.4A.2.3 shall apply.
6.5A.2.3 Adjacent channel leakage ratio for CA
6.5A.2.3 Adjacent channel leakage ratio for CA

For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the carrier aggregation NR adjacent channel leakage power ratio (CA
NRACLR) is the ratio of the filtered mean power centred on the aggregated channel bandwidth to the filtered mean power
centred on an adjacent aggregated channel bandwidth at spacing equal to the aggregated channel bandwidth. The
assigned aggregated channel bandwidth power and adjacent aggregated channel bandwidth power are measured with
rectangular filters with measurement bandwidths specified in 6.5A.2.3-1. If the measured adjacent channel power is
greater than -35 dBm then the NRACLR shall be higher than the value specified in Table 6.5A.2.3-1.
Table 6.5A.2.3-1: General requirements for CA NRACLR

CA bandwidth class / CA NRACLR /
Measurement bandwidth
Any CA bandwidth class
CA NRACLR for band n257, n258, n261 17 dB
CA NRACLR for band n259, n260 16 dB
NR channel measurement bandwidth1 BW Channel_CA – 2*BW GB
+ BW Channel_CA
Adjacent channel centre frequency offset (in
/
MHz)
- BW Channel_CA
NOTE 1: BW GB is defined in clause 5.3A.2.
6.5A.3 Spurious emissions for CA

This clause specifies the spurious emission requirements for carrier aggregation.
For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the spurious emission limits apply for the frequency ranges that are more
than FOOB (MHz) from the edge of the aggregated channel bandwidth, where FOOB is defined as the twice the aggregated
channel bandwidth. For frequencies ΔfOOB greater than FOOB, the spurious emission requirements in Table 6.5.3-2 are
applicable. If carrier leakage or I/Q image lands inside the spectrum occupied by the configured UL and DL CCs,
exception to the spurious emissions requirement applies. For carrier leakage the requirements specified in clause
6.4A.2.2 shall apply. For I/Q image the requirements specified in clause 6.4A.2.3 shall apply.
6.5A.3.1 Spurious emission band UE co-existence for CA

This clause specifies the requirements for the specified carrier aggregation configurations for coexistence with protected
bands.
ETSI
For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the requirements in Table 6.5A.3-1 apply.
Table 6.5A.3-1: Requirements for CA
UL CA for Spurious emission

any CA Protected band / frequency Frequency range Maximum MBW NOTE
bandwidth range (MHz) Level (MHz)
class (dBm)
NR Band n260 FDL_low - FDL_high -2 100
CA_n257
CA_n258 Frequency range 57000 - 66000 2 100
CA_n259
Frequency range 36000 - 37000 7 1000
CA_n260 NR Band 261 FDL_low - FDL_high -5 100
CA_n261
NOTE 1: FDL_low and FDL_high refer to each NR frequency band specified in Table 5.2-1
NOTE 2: The protection of frequency range 23600-24000 MHz is meant for protection of satellite passive
services.
6.5A.3.2 Additional spurious emissions
6.5A.3.2.1 General
These requirements are specified in terms of an additional spectrum emission requirement. Additional spurious
emission requirements are signalled by the network to indicate that the UE shall meet an additional requirement for a
specific deployment scenario as part of the cell handover/broadcast message.
6.5A.3.2.2 Additional spurious emission requirements for CA_NS_201

When "CA_NS_201" is indicated in the cell, the power of any UE emission shall not exceed the levels specified in
Table 6.5.3.2.2-1. This requirement also applies for the frequency ranges that are less than FOOB (MHz) as defined in
clause 6.5A.3.
6.5A.3.2.3 Additional spurious emission requirements for CA_NS_202

When "CA_NS_202" is indicated in the cell, the power of any UE emission shall not exceed the levels specified in
Table 6.5.3.2.3-1.
6.5D Output RF spectrum emissions for UL MIMO

6.5D.1 Occupied bandwidth for UL MIMO
For UE(s) supporting UL MIMO, the occupied bandwidth requirement in clause 6.5.1 apply. The requirements shall be
ETSI
6.5D.2 Out of band emissions for UL MIMO

For UE(s) supporting UL MIMO, the out of band emissions requirements in clause 6.5.2 apply. The requirements shall
be met with the UL MIMO configurations specified in Table 6.2D.1.3-3.
6.5D.3 Spurious emissions for UL MIMO

For UE(s) supporting UL MIMO, the spurious emissions requirements in clause 6.5.3 apply. The requirements shall be
6.6 Beam correspondence

6.6.1 General
Beam correspondence is the ability of the UE to select a suitable beam for UL transmission based on DL measurements
with or without relying on UL beam sweeping. The beam correspondence requirement is satisfied assuming the
presence of both SSB and CSI-RS signals and Type D QCL is maintained between SSB and CSI-RS.
6.6.2 (Void)
6.6.3 (Void)
6.6.4 Beam correspondence for power class 3
6.6.4.1 General
The beam correspondence requirement for power class 3 UEs consists of three components: UE minimum peak EIRP
(as defined in Clause 6.2.1.3), UE spherical coverage (as defined in Clause 6.2.1.3), and beam correspondence tolerance
(as defined in Clause 6.6.4.2). The beam correspondence requirement is fulfilled if the UE satisfies one of the following
conditions, depending on the UE's beam correspondence capability IE beamCorrespondenceWithoutUL-
BeamSweeping, as defined in TS 38.306 [14]:
- If beamCorrespondenceWithoutUL-BeamSweeping is supported, the UE shall meet the minimum peak EIRP

requirement according to Table 6.2.1.3-1 and spherical coverage requirement according to Table 6.2.1.3-3 with
its autonomously chosen UL beams and without uplink beam sweeping. Such a UE is considered to have met
the beam correspondence tolerance requirement.
- If beamCorrespondenceWithoutUL-BeamSweeping is not present, the UE shall meet the minimum peak EIRP
requirement according to Table 6.2.1.3-1 and spherical coverage requirement according to Table 6.2.1.3-3 with
uplink beam sweeping. Such a UE shall meet the beam correspondence tolerance requirement defined in Clause
6.6.4.2 and shall support uplink beam management, as defined in TS 38.306 [14].
6.6.4.2 Beam correspondence tolerance for power class 3

The beam correspondence tolerance requirement ∆EIRPBC for power class 3 UEs is defined based on a percentile of the
distribution of ∆EIRPBC, defined as ∆EIRPBC = EIRP2 - EIRP1 over the link angles spanning a subset of the spherical
coverage grid points, such that
- EIRP1 is the total EIRP in dBm calculated based on the beam the UE chooses autonomously (corresponding
beam) to transmit in the direction of the incoming DL signal, which is based on beam correspondence without
relying on UL beam sweeping.
- EIRP2 is the best total EIRP (beam yielding highest EIRP in a given direction) in dBm which is based on beam
correspondence with relying on UL beam sweeping.
- The link angles are the ones corresponding to the top Nth percentile of the EIRP2 measurement over the whole
sphere, where the value of N is according to the test point of EIRP spherical coverage requirement for power
class 3, i.e. N = 50.
ETSI
For power class 3 UEs, the requirement is fulfilled if the UE's corresponding UL beams satisfy the maximum limit in
Table 6.6.4.2-1.
Table 6.6.4.2-1: UE beam correspondence tolerance for power class 3

Max ∆EIRPBC at 85th %-tile
Operating band
∆EIRPBC CDF (dB)
n257 3.0
n258 3.0
n259 3.2
n260 3.2
n261 3.0
NOTE: The requirements in this table are verified
only under normal temperature conditions as
defined in Annex E.2.1
6.6.4.3 Side Conditions
6.6.4.3.1 Side Condition for SSB and CSI-RS

The beam correspondence requirements are only applied under the following side conditions:
- The downlink reference signals including both SSB and CSI-RS are provided and Type D QCL shall be
maintained between SSB and CSI-RS.
- The reference measurement channel for beam correspondence are fulfilled according to the CSI-RS
configuration in Annex A.3.
- For beam correspondence, conditions for L1-RSRP measurements are fulfilled according to Table 6.6.4.3.1-1
and Table 6.6.4.3.1-2.
Table 6.6.4.3.1-1: Conditions for SSB based L1-RSRP measurements for beam correspondence
SSB
Minimum SSB_RP Note 2
Ês/Iot
Angle of NR operating dBm / SCSSSB
arrival bands
dB
SCSSSB = 120 kHz
n257 -96.4
All angles n258 -96.4
Note 1 ≥6
n260 -92.1
n261 -96.4
NOTE 1: For UEs that support multiple FR2 bands, the Minimum SSB_RP values for all angles are
increased by ΣMBS, the UE multi-band relaxation factor in dB specified in clause 6.2.1.
NOTE 2: Values specified at the radiated requirements reference point to give minimum SSB Ês/Iot,
with no applied noise.
Table 6.6.4.3.1-2: Conditions for CSI-RS based L1-RSRP measurements for beam correspondence
ETSI
CSI-RS
Minimum CSI-RS_RP Note 2
Ês/Iot
Angle of dBm / SCSCSI-RS
NR operating bands
arrival
dB
SCSCSI-RS = 120 kHz
n257 -96.4
All angles n258 -96.4
Note 1 ≥6
n260 -92.1
n261 -96.4
NOTE 1: For UEs that support multiple FR2 bands, the Minimum CSI-RS_RP values are increased by
ΣMBS, the UE multi-band relaxation factor in dB specified in clause 6.2.1.
NOTE 2: Values specified at the radiated requirements reference point to give minimum CSI-RS Ês/Iot,
with no applied noise.
6.6.5 (Void)
6.6A Beam correspondence for CA

For intra-band CA in FR2, the same beam correspondence relationship for beam management is supported across CCs
in Rel-15 and no requirement is specified. Beam correspondence performance for intra-band CA is fulfilled if the beam
correspondence requirements defined in clause 6.6 is met for non-CA case.
ETSI
7 Receiver characteristics
7.1 General
Unless otherwise stated, the receiver characteristics are specified over the air (OTA). The reference receive sensitivity
(REFSENS) is defined assuming a 0 dBi reference antenna located at the center of the quiet zone.
7.2 Diversity characteristics

The minimum requirements on effective isotropic sensitivity (EIS) apply to two measurements, corresponding to DL
signals in orthogonal polarizations.
7.3 Reference sensitivity

7.3.1 General
The reference sensitivity power level REFSENS is defined as the EIS level at the centre of the quiet zone in the RX
beam peak direction, at which the throughput shall meet or exceed the requirements for the specified reference
measurement channel.
7.3.2 Reference sensitivity power level
7.3.2.1 Reference sensitivity power level for power class 1

The throughput shall be ≥ 95 % of the maximum throughput of the reference measurement channels as specified in
Annexes A.2.3.2 and A.3.3.2 (with one sided dynamic OCNG Pattern OP.1 TDD for the DL-signal as described in
Annex A.5.2.1) with peak reference sensitivity specified in Table 7.3.2.1-1. The requirement is verified with the test
metric of EIS (Link=RX beam peak direction, Meas=Link Angle).
Table 7.3.2.1-1: Reference sensitivity for power class 1

Operating REFSENS (dBm) / Channel bandwidth
band 50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz
n257 -97.5 -94.5 -91.5 -88.5
n258 -97.5 -94.5 -91.5 -88.5
n260 -94.5 -91.5 -88.5 -85.5
n261 -97.5 -94.5 -91.5 -88.5
NOTE 1: The transmitter shall be set to PUMAX as defined in clause 6.2.4
The REFSENS requirement shall be met for an uplink transmission using QPSK DFT-s-OFDM waveforms and for
uplink transmission bandwidth less than or equal to that specified in Table 7.3.2.1-2.
Table 7.3.2.1-2: Uplink configuration for reference sensitivity

NR Band / Channel bandwidth / NRB / SCS / Duplex mode
Operating
Duplex
band 50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz SCS
Mode
n257 32 64 128 256 120 kHz TDD
n258 32 64 128 256 120 kHz TDD
n260 32 64 128 256 120 kHz TDD
n261 32 64 128 256 120 kHz TDD
Unless given by Table 7.3.2.1-3, the minimum requirements for reference sensitivity shall be verified with the network
signalling value NS_200 (Table 6.2.3-1) configured.
ETSI
Table 7.3.2.1-3: Network signaling value for reference sensitivity

Operating Network
band Signalling
value
n258 NS_201


Operating band REFSENS (dBm) / Channel bandwidth
n257 -92.0 -89.0 -86.0 -83.0
n258 -92.0 -89.0 -86.0 -83.0
n261 -92.0 -89.0 -86.0 -83.0

For the UEs that support multiple FR2 bands, the minimum requirement for Reference sensitivity in Table 7.3.2.3-1
shall be increased per band, respectively, by the reference sensitivity relaxation parameter ∆MBP,n as specified in clause
6.2.1.3. The requirement for the UE which supports a single FR2 band is specified in Table 7.3.2.3-1. The requirement
for the UE which supports multiple FR2 bands is specified in both Table 7.3.2.3-1 and Table 6.2.1.3-4.
Table 7.3.2.3-1: Reference sensitivity

n257 -88.3 -85.3 -82.3 -79.3
n258 -88.3 -85.3 -82.3 -79.3
n259 -84.7 -81.7 -78.7 -75.7
n260 -85.7 -82.7 -79.7 -76.7
n261 -88.3 -85.3 -82.3 -79.3
ETSI

The throughput shall be ≥ 95% of the maximum throughput of the reference measurement channels as specified in

n257 -97.0 -94.0 -91.0 -88.0
n258 -97.0 -94.0 -91.0 -88.0
n260 -95.0 -92.0 -89.0 -86.0
n261 -97.0 -94.0 -91.0 -88.0
7.3.3 Void
7.3.4 EIS spherical coverage
7.3.4.1 EIS spherical coverage for power class 1

The reference measurement channels and throughput criterion shall be as specified in clause 7.3.2.1
The maximum EIS at the 85th percentile of the CCDF of EIS measured over the full sphere around the UE is defined as
the spherical coverage requirement and is found in Table 7.3.4.1-1 below. The requirement is verified with the test
metric of EIS (Link=Spherical coverage grid, Meas=Link angle).
Table 7.3.4.1-1: EIS spherical coverage for power class 1

Operating EIS at 85th %-tile CCDF (dBm) / Channel bandwidth
band 50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz
n257 -89.5 -86.5 -83.5 -80.5
n258 -89.5 -86.5 -83.5 -80.5
n260 -86.5 -83.5 -80.5 -77.5
n261 -89.5 -86.5 -83.5 -80.5
NOTE 2: The EIS spherical coverage requirements are verified only under normal thermal
conditions as defined in Annex E.2.1.
The requirement shall be met for an uplink transmission using QPSK DFT-s-OFDM waveforms and for uplink
transmission bandwidth less than or equal to that specified in Table 7.3.2.1-2.

ETSI

Operating band EIS at 60th %-tile CCDF (dBm) / Channel bandwidth
n257 -81.0 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0
n258 -81.0 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0
n261 -81.0 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0

For the UEs that support multiple FR2 bands, the minimum requirement for EIS spherical coverage in Table 7.3.4.3-1
shall be increased per band, respectively, by the EIS spherical coveragerelaxation parameter ∆MBS,n as specified in
clause 6.2.1.3. The requirement for the UE which supports a single FR2 band is specified in Table 7.3.4.3-1. The
requirement for the UE which supports multiple FR2 bands is specified in both Table 7.3.4.3-1 and Table 6.2.1.3-4.

n257 -77.4 -74.4 -71.4 -68.4
n258 -77.4 -74.4 -71.4 -68.4
n259 -71.9 -68.9 -65.9 -62.9
n260 -73.1 -70.1 -67.1 -64.1
n261 -77.4 -74.4 -71.4 -68.4

ETSI

n257 -88.0 -85.0 -82.0 -79.0
n258 -88.0 -85.0 -82.0 -79.0
n260 -83.0 -80.0 -77.0 -74.0
n261 -88.0 -85.0 -82.0 -79.0
7.3A Reference sensitivity for CA

7.3A.1 General
7.3A.2 Reference sensitivity power level for CA
7.3A.2.1 Intra-band contiguous CA

For each component carrier in the intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the throughput in QPSK R = 1/3 shall be ≥
95 % of the maximum throughput of the reference measurement channels as specified in Annexes A.2.3.2 and A.3.3.2
(with one sided dynamic OCNG Pattern OP.1 TDD for the DL-signal as described in Annex A.5.2.1) with peak
reference sensitivity values determined from clause 7.3.2, and relaxation applied to peak reference sensitivity
requirement as specified in Table 7.3A.2.1-1.
Table 7.3A.2.1-1: ΔRIB EIS Relaxation for CA operation by aggregated channel bandwidth
Aggregated Channel BW 'BWChannel_CA' (MHz) ΔRIB (dB)
BW Channel_CA ≤ 800 0.0
800 < BW Channel_CA ≤ 1200 0.5
7.3A.2.2 Intra-band non-contiguous CA

For each component carrier in the intra-band non-contiguous carrier aggregation, the throughput shall be ≥ 95 % of the
maximum throughput of the reference measurement channels as specified in Annexes A.2.3.2 and A.3.3.2 (with one
sided dynamic OCNG Pattern OP.1 TDD for the DL-signal as described in Annex A.5.2.1) with peak reference
sensitivity values determined from clause 7.3.2, and relaxation applied to peak reference sensitivity requirement as
specified in Table 7.3A.2.2-1. The cumulative aggregated channel bandwidth is defined as the frequency band from the
lowest edge of the lowest CC to the upper edge of the highest CC of all UL and DL configured CCs.
Table 7.3A.2.2-1: ΔRIB EIS Relaxation for CA operation by cumulative aggregated channel bandwidth
Cumulative Aggregated Channel BW (MHz) ΔRIB (dB)
≤ 800 0.0
> 800 and ≤ 1400 0.5
ETSI
7.3D Reference sensitivity for UL MIMO

For UL MIMO, the reference sensitivity requirements in clause 7.3 apply. The requirements shall be met with the UL
MIMO configurations specified in Table 6.2D.1.3-3.
7.4 Maximum input level

The maximum input level is defined as the maximum mean power, for which the throughput shall meet or exceed the
minimum requirements for the specified reference measurement channel.
The maximum input level is defined as a directional requirement. The requirement is verified in beam locked mode in the
direction where peak gain is achieved.
The throughput shall be ≥ 95 % of the maximum throughput of the reference measurement channels as specified in Annex
A (with one sided dynamic OCNG Pattern OP.1 TDD for the DL-signal as described in Annex A.5.2.1) with parameters
specified in Table 7.4.-1. The requirement is verified with the test metric of EIS (Link=RX beam peak direction,
Meas=Link angle).
Table 7.4-1: Maximum input level

Channel bandwidth
Rx Parameter Units 50 100 200 400
MHz MHz MHz MHz
Power in transmission -25 (NOTE 2)
dBm
bandwidth configuration -27 (NOTE 3)
NOTE 1: The transmitter shall be set to 4 dB below the PUMAX,f,c as defined in clause 6.2.4, with
uplink configuration specified in Table 7.3.2.1-2.
NOTE 2: Reference measurement channel is specified in Annex A.3.3.2: QPSK, R=1/3 variant
with one sided dynamic OCNG Pattern as described in Annex A.
NOTE 3: Reference measurement channel is specified in Annex A.3.3.5: 256QAM, R=4/5 variant
Table 7.4-2: Void
7.4A Maximum input level for CA

Table 7.4A-1: Void
Table 7.4A-2: Void
7.4A.1 Maximum input level for Intra-band contiguous CA

For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation the input level is defined as the cumulative received power, summed over
the transmission bandwidth configurations of each active DL CC. All DL CCs shall be active throughout the test. The
input power shall be distributed among the active DL CCs so their PSDs are aligned with each other. At the maximum
input level, the specified relative throughput shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements for the specified reference
measurement channel over each component carrier. The minimum requirement is specified in Table 7.4A-1.
The maximum input level is defined as a directional requirement. The requirement is verified in beam locked mode in
the direction where peak gain is achieved. The requirement is verified with the test metric of EIS (Link=RX beam peak
ETSI
Table 7.4A.1-1: Maximum input level for Intra-band contiguous CA

Rx Parameter Units Level
Power summed over transmission bandwidth -25 (NOTE 2)
dBm
configurations of all active DL CCs -27 (NOTE 3)
NOTE 1: The transmitter shall be set to 4 dB below the PUMAX,f,c as defined in clause 6.2.4, with
uplink configuration specified in Table 7.3.2.1-2
NOTE 2: Reference measurement channel in each CC is specified in Annex A.3.3.2: QPSK, R=1/3
variant with one sided dynamic OCNG Pattern as described in Annex A.
NOTE 3: Reference measurement channel is specified in Annex A.3.3.5: 256QAM, R=4/5 variant
7.4A.2 Maximum input level for Intra-band non-contiguous CA

For intra-band non-contiguous carrier aggregation the requirement of section 7.4A.1 applies
7.4A.3 void
7.4D Maximum input level for UL MIMO

For UL MIMO, the maximum input level requirements in clause 7.4 apply. The requirements shall be met with the UL
MIMO configurations specified in Table 6.2D.1.3-3.
7.5 Adjacent channel selectivity

Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS) is a measure of a receiver's ability to receive a NR signal at its assigned channel
frequency in the presence of an adjacent channel signal at a given frequency offset from the centre frequency of the
assigned channel. ACS is the ratio of the receive filter attenuation on the assigned channel frequency to the receive filter
attenuation on the adjacent channel(s).
The requirement applies at the RIB when the AoA of the incident wave of the wanted signal and the interfering signal are
both from the direction where peak gain is achieved.
The wanted and interfering signals apply to all supported polarizations, under the assumption of polarization match.
The UE shall fulfil the minimum requirement specified in Table 7.5-1 for all values of an adjacent channel interferer up
to –25 dBm. However, it is not possible to directly measure the ACS, instead the lower and upper range of test
parameters are chosen in Table 7.5-2 and Table 7.5-3 where the throughput shall be ≥ 95 % of the maximum throughput
of the reference measurement channels as specified in Annexes A.2.3.2 and A.3.3.2, with one sided dynamic OCNG
Pattern OP.1 TDD for the DL-signal as described in Annex A.5.2.1. The requirement is verified with the test metric of
EIS (Link=RX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
Table 7.5A.1-1: Adjacent channel selectivity

Operating band Units Adjacent channel selectivity / Channel bandwidth
50 100 200 400
MHz MHz MHz MHz
n257, n258,
dB 23 23 23 23
n261
n259, n260 dB 22 22 22 22
ETSI
Table 7.5A.1-2: Adjacent channel selectivity test parameters, Case 1

Rx Parameter Units Channel bandwidth
Power in dBm
Transmission
REFSENS + 14 dB
Bandwidth
Configuration
PInterferer for dBm REFSENS REFSENS REFSENS REFSENS
band n257, + 35.5 dB +35.5 dB +35.5 dB +35.5 dB
n258, n259,
n261
PInterferer for dBm REFSENS REFSENS REFSENS REFSENS
band n260 + 34.5 dB +34.5 dB +34.5 dB +34.5 dB
BW Interferer MHz 50 100 200 400
FInterferer (offset) MHz 50 100 200 400
/ / / /
-50 -100 -200 -400
NOTE 3 NOTE 3 NOTE 3 NOTE 3
NOTE 1: The interferer consists of the Reference measurement channel specified in Annex A.3.2 with one sided
dynamic OCNG Pattern as described in Annex A.3.2 and set-up according to Annex C.
NOTE 2: The REFSENS power level is specified in Clause 7.3.2, which are applicable to different UE power classes.
NOTE 3: The absolute value of the interferer offset FInterferer (offset) shall be further adjusted to (CEIL(|FInterferer|/SCS)
+ 0.5)*SCS MHz with SCS the sub-carrier spacing of the wanted signal in MHz. Wanted and interferer
signal have same SCS.
NOTE 4: The transmitter shall be set to 4 dB below the PUMAX,f,c as defined in clause 6.2.4, with uplink configuration
specified in Table 7.3.2.1-2.
Table 7.5A.1-3: Adjacent channel selectivity test parameters, Case 2

Rx Parameter Units Channel bandwidth
Power in
Transmission
Bandwidth
dBm -46.5 -46.5 -46.5 -46.5
Configuration
for band n257,
n258, n261
Power in
Transmission
Bandwidth
dBm -45.5 -45.5 -45.5 -45.5
Configuration
for band n259,
n260
PInterferer dBm -25
FInterferer (offset) MHz 50 100 200 400
/ / / /
-50 -100 -200 -400
NOTE 1: The interferer consists of the Reference measurement channel specified in Annex 3.2 with one sided
dynamic OCNG Pattern TDD as described in Annex A and set-up according to Annex C.
NOTE 2: The absolute value of the interferer offset FInterferer (offset) shall be further adjusted to (CEIL(|FInterferer|/SCS)
+ 0.5)*SCS MHz with SCS the sub-carrier spacing of the wanted signal in MHz. Wanted and interferer
signal have same SCS.
ETSI
7.5A Adjacent channel selectivity for CA

Table 7.5A-1: Void
Table 7.5A-2: Void
Table 7.5A-3: Void
7.5A.1 Adjacent channel selectivity for Intra-band contiguous CA

For intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the SCC(s) shall be configured at nominal channel spacing to the PCC.
The input power shall be distributed among the active DL CCs so their PSDs are aligned with each other. The UE shall
fulfil the minimum requirement specified in Table 7.5A.1-1 for an adjacent channel interferer on either side of the
aggregated downlink signal at a specified frequency offset and for an interferer power up to -25 dBm.
The throughput of each carrier shall be ≥ 95% of the maximum throughput of the reference measurement channels as
specified in Annexes A.2.3.2 and A.3.3.2 (with one sided dynamic OCNG Pattern OP.1 TDD for the DL-signal as
described in Annex A.5.2.1). The requirement is verified with the test metric of EIS (Link=RX beam peak direction,
Meas=Link angle).
Table 7.5A.1-1: Adjacent channel selectivity for intra-band contiguous CA

Adjacent channel selectivity /
CA bandwidth class
Operating band Units
All CA bandwidth class
n257, n258, n261 dB 23
n260 dB 22
Table 7.5A.1-2: Adjacent channel selectivity test parameters for intra-band contiguous CA, Case 1
Rx Parameter Units All CA bandwidth Classes

Pw in Transmission Bandwidth
REFSENS + 14 dB
Configuration, per CC
PInterferer for band n257, n258, n261 dBm Aggregated power + 21.5
PInterferer for band n260 dBm Aggregated power + 20.5
BW Interferer MHz BW Channel_CA
+ BW channel CA
/
FInterferer (offset) MHz - BW channel CA
NOTE 3
NOTE 1: The interferer consists of the Reference measurement channel specified in Annex
3.2 with one sided dynamic OCNG Pattern as described in Annex A and set-up
according to Annex C.
NOTE 2: The Finterferer (offset) is the frequency separation between the center of the
aggregated CA bandwidth and the center frequency of the Interferer signal
NOTE 3: The absolute value of the interferer offset FInterferer (offset) shall be further adjusted to
(CEIL(|FInterferer|/SCS) + 0.5)*SCS MHz with SCS the sub-carrier spacing of the
carrier closest to the interferer in MHz. The interfering signal has the same SCS as
that of the closest carrier.
ETSI
Table 7.5A.1-3: Adjacent channel selectivity test parameters for intra-band contiguous CA, Case 2
Rx Parameter Units
All CA bandwidth classes
Pw in Transmission Bandwidth Configuration,
dBm - 46.5
aggregated power for band n257, n258, n261
Pw in Transmission Bandwidth Configuration,
dBm - 45.5
aggregated power for band n260
Pinterferer dBm - 25
+ BW channel CA
/
FInterferer (offset) MHz - BW channel CA
NOTE 3
NOTE 1: The interferer consists of the Reference measurement channel specified in Annex
A.3.3.2 with one sided dynamic OCNG Pattern OP.1 TDD as described in Annex
A.5.2.1 and set-up according to Annex C.
NOTE 2: The Finterferer (offset) is the frequency separation between the center of the
aggregated CA bandwidth and the center frequency of the Interferer signal
7.5A.2 Adjacent channel selectivity for Intra-band non-contiguous CA

For intra-band non-contiguous carrier aggregation with two component carriers, two different requirements apply for
out-of-gap and in-gap. For out-of-gap, the UE shall meet the requirements for each component carrier as specified in
clauses 7.5. For in-gap, the requirement applies if the following minimum gap condition is met:
∆fACS ≥ BW1/2 + BW2/2 + max(BW1, BW2),

where ∆fACS is the frequency separation between the center frequencies of the component carriers and BWk/2 are the
channel bandwidths of carrier k, k = 1,2.
If the minimum gap condition is met, the UE shall meet the requirements specified in clauses 7.5 for each component
carrier considered. The respective channel bandwidth of the component carrier under test will be used in the parameter
calculations of the requirement. In case of more than two component carriers, the minimum gap condition is computed
for any pair of adjacent component carriers following the same approach as the two component carriers. The in-gap
requirement for the corresponding pairs shall apply if the minimum gap condition is met.
For every component carrier to which the requirements apply, the UE shall meet the requirement with one active
interferer signal (in-gap or out-of-gap) while all downlink carriers are active and the input power shall be distributed
among the active DL CCs so their PSDs are aligned with each other.
7.5A.3 void
7.5D Adjacent channel selectivity for UL MIMO

For UL MIMO, the adjacent channel selectivity requirements in clause 7.5 apply. The requirements shall be met with
the UL MIMO configurations specified in Table 6.2D.1.3-3.
ETSI
7.6 Blocking characteristics

7.6.1 General
The blocking characteristic is a measure of the receiver's ability to receive a wanted signal at its assigned channel
frequency in the presence of an unwanted interferer on frequencies other than those of the spurious response or the
adjacent channels, without this unwanted input signal causing a degradation of the performance of the receiver beyond a
specified limit. The blocking performance shall apply at all frequencies except those at which a spurious response
occurs.
The requirement applies at the RIB when the AoA of the incident wave of the wanted signal and the interfering signal
are both from the direction where peak gain is achieved.
The wanted and interfering signals apply to all supported polarizations, under the assumption of polarization match.
7.6.2 In-band blocking

In-band blocking is a measure of a receiver's ability to receive a NR signal at its assigned channel frequency in the
presence of an interferer at a given frequency offset from the centre frequency of the assigned channel.
Annex A.5.2.1). The requirement is verified with the test metric of EIS (Link=RX beam peak direction, Meas=Link
angle).
Table 7.6.2-1: In band blocking requirements

Rx parameter Units Channel bandwidth
Power in
Transmission REFSENS + 14 dB
dBm
Bandwidth
Configuration
PInterferer
REFSENS + 35.5 REFSENS + 35.5 REFSENS + 35.5 REFSENS + 35.5
for bands n257, dBm
dB dB dB dB
n258, n261
PInterferer
REFSENS + 34.5 REFSENS + 34.5 REFSENS + 34.5 REFSENS + 34.5
for band n259, dBm
dB dB dB dB
n260
FIoffset MHz ≤ -100 & ≥ 100 ≤ -200 & ≥ 200 ≤ -400 & ≥ 400 ≤ -800 & ≥ 800
FInterferer MHz FDL_low + 25 FDL_low + 50 FDL_low + 100 FDL_low + 200
to to to to
FDL_high - 25 FDL_high - 50 FDL_high - 100 FDL_high - 200
NOTE 1: The interferer consists of the Reference measurement channel specified in Annex A.3.3.2 with one sided
dynamic OCNG Pattern OP.1. TDD as described in Annex A.5.2.1 and set-up according to Annex C.
NOTE2: The REFSENS power level is specified in Clause 7.3.2, which are applicable according to different UE
power classes.
NOTE 3: The wanted signal consists of the reference measurement channel specified in Annex A.3.3.2 with one
sided dynamic OCNG pattern OP.1 TDD as described in Annex A.5.2.1 and set-up according to Annex C.
NOTE 4: FIoffset is the frequency separation between the center of the channel bandwidth and the center frequency of
the Interferer signal.
NOTE 5: The absolute value of the interferer offset FIoffset shall be further adjusted (CEIL(|FInterferer|/SCS) + 0.5)*SCS
MHz with SCS the sub-carrier spacing of the wanted signal in MHz. Wanted and interferer signal have same
SCS.
NOTE 6: FInterferer range values for unwanted modulated interfering signals are interferer center frequencies.
ETSI
7.6.3 Void
7.6A Blocking characteristics for CA

7.6A.1 General
7.6A.2 In-band blocking

7.6A.2.1 In-band blocking for Intra-band contiguous CAFor intra-band contiguous carrier aggregation, the SCC(s)
shall be configured at nominal channel spacing to the PCC. The input power shall be distributed among the active DL
CCs so their PSDs are aligned with each other. The UE shall fulfil the minimum requirement specified in Table 7.6A.2-
1 for in the presence of an interferer at a given frequency offset from the centre frequency of the assigned channel and
an interferer power shall not exceed -25 dBm. The throughput of each carrier shall be ≥ 95% of the maximum
throughput of the reference measurement channels as specified in Annexes A.2.3.2 and A.3.3.2 (with one sided
dynamic OCNG Pattern OP.1 TDD for the DL-signal as described in Annex A.5.2.1). The requirement is verified with
the test metric of EIS (Link=RX beam peak direction, Meas=Link angle).
Table 7.6A.2.1-1: In band blocking minimum requirements for intra-band contiguous CA
Rx
Units All CA bandwidth classes
Parameter
Power in
Transmission
Bandwidth REFSENS + 14 dB
Configuration,
per CC
Pinterferer for
band n257, dBm Aggregated power + 21.5
n258, n261
Pinterferer for
dBm Aggregated power + 20.5
band n260
+2*BW Channel_CA / -2*BW Channel_CA

FIoffset MHz
NOTE 5
FDL_low + 0.5*BW Channel_CA

FInterferer MHz To
FDL_high - 0.5*BW Channel_CA
NOTE 1: The interferer consists of the Reference measurement channel specified in
Annex A.3.3.2 with one sided dynamic OCNG Pattern OP.1 TDD as described in
Annex A.5.2.1. and set-up according to Annex C.
NOTE 2: The REFSENS power level is specified in Table 7.3.2-1.
NOTE 3: The wanted signal consists of the reference measurement channel specified in
Annex A.3.3.2 QPSK, R=1/3 with one sided dynamic OCNG pattern OP.1 TDD as
described in Annex A.5.2.1 and set-up according to Annex C.
NOTE 4: The FInterferer (offset) is the frequency separation between the center of the
aggregated CA bandwidth and the center frequency of the Interferer signal.
NOTE 6: FInterferer range values for unwanted modulated interfering signals are interferer center
frequencies.
NOTE 7: The transmitter shall be set to 4 dB below the PUMAX,f,c as defined in clause 6.2.4,
with uplink configuration specified in Table 7.3.2.1-2.
ETSI
7.6A.2.2 In-band blocking for Intra-band non-contiguous CA

For intra-band non-contiguous carrier aggregation with two component carriers, the requirement applies to out-of-gap
and in-gap. For out-of-gap, the UE shall meet the requirements for each component carrier with parameters as specified
in 7.6.2-1. The requirement associated to the maximum channel between across the component carriers is selected. For
in-gap, the requirement shall apply if the following minimum gap condition is met:
∆fIBB ≥ 0.5(BW1 + BW2) + 2 max(BW1, BW2),

where ∆fIBB is the frequency separation between the center frequencies of the component carriers and BWk/2 are the
channel bandwidths of carrier k, k = 1,2.
If the minimum gap condition is met, the UE shall meet the requirement specified in Table 7.6.2-1 for each component
carrier. The respective channel bandwidth of the component carrier under test will be used in the parameter calculations
of the requirement. In case of more than two component carriers, the minimum gap condition is computed for any pair
of adjacent component carriers following the same approach as the two component carriers. The in-gap requirement for
the corresponding pairs shall apply if the minimum gap condition is met. For every component carrier to which the
requirements apply, the UE shall meet the requirement with one active interferer signal (in-gap or out-of-gap) while all
downlink carriers are active and the input power shall be distributed among the active DL CCs so their PSDs are
aligned with each other.
7.6A.2.3 void
7.6D Blocking characteristics for UL MIMO

For UL MIMO, the blocking characteristics requirements in clause 7.6 apply. The requirements shall be met with the
UL MIMO configurations specified in Table 6.2D.1.3-3.
7.7 Void
7.8 Void
7.9 Spurious emissions

The spurious emissions power is the power of emissions generated or amplified in a receiver. The spurious emissions
power level is measured as TRP.
The power of any narrow band CW spurious emission shall not exceed the maximum level specified in Table 7.9-1. The
requirement is verified in beam locked mode with the test metric of TRP (Link=TX beam peak direction, Meas=TRP
grid).
Table 7.9-1: General receiver spurious emission requirements

Frequency range Measurement Maximum NOTE
bandwidth level
30MHz ≤ f < 1GHz 100 kHz -57 dBm 1
1GHz ≤ f ≤ 2nd harmonic of 1 MHz -47 dBm
the upper frequency edge of
the DL operating band in
GHz
NOTE 1: Unused PDCCH resources are padded with resource element groups with power level given
by PDCCH as defined in Annex C.3.1.
ETSI
7.10 Void
ETSI
Annex A (normative):
Measurement channels
A.1 General
A.2 UL reference measurement channels
A.2.1 General
A.2.2 Void
ETSI
A.2.3 Reference measurement channels for TDD

For UL RMCs defined below, TDD slot pattern defined in Table A.2.3-1 will be used for the requirements requiring at least one sub frame (1ms) for the measurement period.
For other requirements, TDD slot patterns defined for reference sensitivity tests in Table A.3.3.1-1 will be used.
Table A.2.3-1: Additional reference channels parameters for TDD
Value
Parameter SCS 60 kHz SCS 120 kHz
(µ=2) (µ=3)
TDD Slot Configuration pattern (Note 1) DDDSUUUU 7DS8U
Special Slot Configuration (Note 2) S=4D+6G+4U S=12D+2G
referenceSubcarrierSpacing 60 kHz 120 kHz
dl-UL-TransmissionPeriodicity 2 ms 2 ms
nrofDownlinkSlots 3 7
UL-DL
nrofDownlinkSymbols 4 12
configuration
nrofUplinkSlot 4 8
nrofUplinkSymbols 0 0
mod(slot index, mod(slot index,
Indexes of active UL slots
40) = {36,…,39} 80) = {72,…,79}
NOTE 1: D denotes a slot with all DL symbols; S denotes a slot with a mix of DL, UL and guard
symbols; U denotes a slot with all UL symbols. The field is for information.
NOTE 2: D, G, U denote DL, guard and UL symbols, respectively. The field is for information.
ETSI
A.2.3.1 DFT-s-OFDM Pi/2-BPSK

Table A.2.3.1-1: Reference Channels for DFT-s-OFDM pi/2-BPSK for 60 kHz SCS
Parameter Channel Subcarrier Allocated DFT-s- Modulation MCS Target Payload Transport LDPC Number Total Total
bandwidth Spacing resource OFDM Index Coding size for block Base of code number modulated
blocks Symbols (Note Rate UL slots CRC Graph blocks of bits symbols
per slot 2) (Note 4) per slot per slot per slot
(Note 1) for UL for UL for UL
slots slots slots
(Note 3, (Note 4) (Note 4)
Note 4)
Unit MHz KHz Bits Bits Bits
50-200 60 1 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 32 16 2 1 132 132
50-200 60 16 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 480 16 2 1 2024 2024
50 60 32 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 1032 16 2 1 4224 4224
50 60 64 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 2024 16 2 1 8448 8448
100 60 64 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 2024 16 2 1 8448 8448
100 60 128 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 3976 24 2 2 16896 16896
200 60 128 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 3976 24 2 2 16896 16896
200 60 256 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 7944 24 2 3 33792 33792
NOTE 1: PUSCH mapping Type-A and single-symbol DM-RS configuration Type-1 with 2 additional DM-RS symbols, such that the DM-RS positions are set to symbols 2, 7,
11. DMRS is [TDM'ed] with PUSCH data.
NOTE 2: MCS Index is based on MCS table 6.1.4.1-1 defined in 38.214.
NOTE 3: If more than one Code Block is present, an additional CRC sequence of L = 24 Bits is attached to each Code Block (otherwise L = 0 Bit)
NOTE 4: Indexes of active UL slots are given by Table A.2.3-1 with TDD UL-DL configuration specified in A2.3 for the requirements requiring at least one sub frame (1ms) for
the measurement period. For other requirements, indexes of active UL slots are given by the slots satisfying mod(slot index+1, 5) = 0 with TDD UL-DL configuration
specified in A.3.3.1.
ETSI
Table A.2.3.1-2: Reference Channels for DFT-s-OFDM pi/2-BPSK for 120 kHz SCS
slots slots slots
Note 4)
50-400 120 1 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 32 16 2 1 132 132
50 120 16 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 504 16 2 1 2112 2112
50 120 32 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 1032 16 2 1 4224 4224
100 120 32 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 1032 16 2 1 4224 4224
100 120 64 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 2024 16 2 1 8448 8448
200 120 64 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 2024 16 2 1 8448 8448
200 120 128 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 3976 24 2 2 16896 16896
400 120 128 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 3976 24 2 2 16896 16896
400 120 256 11 pi/2 BPSK 0 1/4 7944 24 2 3 33792 33792
ETSI
A.2.3.2 DFT-s-OFDM QPSK

Table A.2.3.2-1: Reference Channels for DFT-s-OFDM QPSK for 60 kHz SCS
slots slots slots
Note 4)
50-200 60 1 11 QPSK 2 1/6 48 16 2 1 264 132
50-200 60 16 11 QPSK 2 1/6 808 16 2 1 4048 2024
50 60 32 11 QPSK 2 1/6 1608 16 2 1 8448 4224
50 60 64 11 QPSK 2 1/6 3240 16 2 1 16896 8448
100 60 64 11 QPSK 2 1/6 3240 16 2 1 16896 8448
100 60 128 11 QPSK 2 1/6 6408 24 2 2 33792 16896
200 60 128 11 QPSK 2 1/6 6408 24 2 2 33792 16896
200 60 256 11 QPSK 2 1/6 12808 24 2 4 67584 33792
ETSI
Table A.2.3.2-2: Reference Channels for DFT-s-OFDM QPSK for 120 kHz SCS
slots slots slots
Note 4)
50-400 120 1 11 QPSK 2 1/6 48 16 2 1 264 132
50 120 16 11 QPSK 2 1/6 808 16 2 1 4224 2112
50 120 32 11 QPSK 2 1/6 1608 16 2 1 8448 4224
100 120 20 11 QPSK 2 1/6 984 16 2 1 5060 2530
100 120 32 11 QPSK 2 1/6 1608 16 2 1 8448 4224
100 120 64 11 QPSK 2 1/6 3240 16 2 1 16896 8448
200 120 64 11 QPSK 2 1/6 3240 16 2 1 16896 8448
200 120 128 11 QPSK 2 1/6 6408 24 2 2 33792 16896
400 120 128 11 QPSK 2 1/6 6408 24 2 2 33792 16896
400 120 256 11 QPSK 2 1/6 12808 24 2 4 67584 33792
ETSI
A.2.3.3 DFT-s-OFDM 16QAM

Table A.2.3.3-1: Reference Channels for DFT-s-OFDM 16QAM for 60 kHz SCS
slots slots slots
Note 4)
50-200 60 1 11 16QAM 10 1/3 176 16 2 1 528 132
50 60 32 11 16QAM 10 1/3 5632 24 1 1 16896 4224
50 60 64 11 16QAM 10 1/3 11272 24 1 2 33792 8448
100 60 64 11 16QAM 10 1/3 11272 24 1 2 33792 8448
100 60 128 11 16QAM 10 1/3 22536 24 1 3 67584 16896
200 60 128 11 16QAM 10 1/3 22536 24 1 3 67584 16896
200 60 256 11 16QAM 10 1/3 45096 24 1 6 135168 33792
ETSI
slots slots slots
Note 4)
50-400 120 1 11 16QAM 10 1/3 176 16 2 1 528 132
50 120 16 11 16QAM 10 1/3 2792 16 2 1 8448 2112
50 120 32 11 16QAM 10 1/3 5632 24 1 1 16896 4224
100 120 32 11 16QAM 10 1/3 5632 24 1 1 16896 4224
100 120 64 11 16QAM 10 1/3 11272 24 1 2 33792 8448
200 120 64 11 16QAM 10 1/3 11272 24 1 2 33792 8448
200 120 128 11 16QAM 10 1/3 22536 24 1 3 67584 16896
400 120 128 11 16QAM 10 1/3 22536 24 1 3 67584 16896
400 120 256 11 16QAM 10 1/3 45096 24 1 6 135168 33792
ETSI
A.2.3.4 DFT-s-OFDM 64QAM

slots slots slots
Note 4)
50-200 60 1 11 64QAM 18 1/2 408 16 2 1 792 132
50 60 32 11 64QAM 18 1/2 12808 24 1 2 25344 4224
50 60 64 11 64QAM 18 1/2 25608 24 1 4 50688 8448
100 60 64 11 64QAM 18 1/2 25608 24 1 4 50688 8448
100 60 128 11 64QAM 18 1/2 51216 24 1 7 101376 16896
200 60 128 11 64QAM 18 1/2 51216 24 1 7 101376 16896
200 60 256 11 64QAM 18 1/2 102416 24 1 13 202752 33792
ETSI
slots slots slots
Note 4)
50-400 120 1 11 64QAM 18 1/2 408 16 2 1 792 132
50 120 16 11 64QAM 18 1/2 6400 24 1 1 12672 2112
50 120 32 11 64QAM 18 1/2 12808 24 1 2 25344 4224
100 120 32 11 64QAM 18 1/2 12808 24 1 2 25344 4224
100 120 64 11 64QAM 18 1/2 25608 24 1 4 50688 8448
200 120 64 11 64QAM 18 1/2 25608 24 1 4 50688 8448
200 120 128 11 64QAM 18 1/2 51216 24 1 7 101376 16896
400 120 128 11 64QAM 18 1/2 51216 24 1 7 101376 16896
400 120 256 11 64QAM 18 1/2 102416 24 1 13 202752 33792
ETSI
A.2.3.5 CP-OFDM QPSK

Table A.2.3.5-1: Reference Channels for CP-OFDM QPSK for 60 kHz SCS
Parameter Channel Subcarrier Allocated CP- Modulation MCS Target Payload Transport LDPC Number Total Total
slots slots slots
Note 4)
50-200 60 1 11 QPSK 2 1/6 48 16 2 1 264 132
50-200 60 16 11 QPSK 2 1/6 808 16 2 1 4048 2024
50 60 33 11 QPSK 2 1/6 1672 16 2 1 8712 4356
50 60 66 11 QPSK 2 1/6 3368 16 2 1 17424 8712
100 60 66 11 QPSK 2 1/6 3368 16 2 1 17424 8712
100 60 132 11 QPSK 2 1/6 6536 24 2 2 34848 17424
200 60 132 11 QPSK 2 1/6 6536 24 2 2 34848 17424
200 60 264 11 QPSK 2 1/6 13064 24 2 4 69696 34848
ETSI
Table A.2.3.5-2: Reference Channels for CP-OFDM QPSK for 120 kHz SCS
bandwidth Spacing resource OFDM Index Coding size for block Base of code number of modulated
blocks Symbols (Note Rate UL slots CRC Graph blocks bits per symbols
per slot 2) (Note 4) per slot slot for per slot
(Note 1) for UL UL for UL
slots slots(Note slots
(Note 3, 4) (Note 4)
Note 4)
50-400 120 1 11 QPSK 2 1/6 48 16 2 1 264 132
50 120 16 11 QPSK 2 1/6 808 16 2 1 4224 2112
50 120 32 11 QPSK 2 1/6 1608 16 2 1 8448 4224
100 120 33 11 QPSK 2 1/6 1672 16 2 1 8712 4356
100 120 66 11 QPSK 2 1/6 3368 16 2 1 17424 8712
200 120 66 11 QPSK 2 1/6 3368 16 2 1 17424 8712
200 120 132 11 QPSK 2 1/6 6536 24 2 2 34848 17424
400 120 132 11 QPSK 2 1/6 6536 24 2 2 34848 17424
400 120 264 11 QPSK 2 1/6 13064 24 2 4 69696 34848
NOTE 1: PUSCH mapping Type-A and single-symbol DM-RS configuration Type-1 with 2 additional DM-RS symbols, such that the DM-RS positions are set to symbols 2, 7, 11.
DMRS is [TDM'ed] with PUSCH data.
NOTE 4: Indexes of active UL slots are given by Table A.2.3-1 with TDD UL-DL configuration specified in A2.3 for the requirements requiring at least one sub frame (1ms) for the
measurement period. For other requirements, indexes of active UL slots are given by the slots satisfying mod(slot index+1, 5) = 0 with TDD UL-DL configuration
ETSI
A.2.3.6 CP-OFDM 16QAM

Table A.2.3.6-1: Reference Channels for CP-OFDM 16QAM for 60 kHz SCS
slots slots slots
Note 4)
50-200 60 1 11 16QAM 10 1/3 176 16 2 1 528 132
50 60 33 11 16QAM 10 1/3 5760 24 1 1 17424 4356
50 60 66 11 16QAM 10 1/3 11528 24 1 2 34848 8712
100 60 66 11 16QAM 10 1/3 11528 24 1 2 34848 8712
100 60 132 11 16QAM 10 1/3 23040 24 1 3 69696 17424
200 60 132 11 16QAM 10 1/3 23040 24 1 3 69696 17424
200 60 264 11 16QAM 10 1/3 46104 24 1 6 139392 34848
ETSI
slots slots slots
Note 4)
50-400 120 1 11 16QAM 10 1/3 176 16 2 1 528 132
50 120 16 11 16QAM 10 1/3 2792 16 2 1 8448 2112
50 120 32 11 16QAM 10 1/3 5632 24 1 1 16896 4224
100 120 33 11 16QAM 10 1/3 5760 24 1 1 17424 4356
100 120 66 11 16QAM 10 1/3 11528 24 1 2 34848 8712
200 120 66 11 16QAM 10 1/3 11528 24 1 2 34848 8712
200 120 132 11 16QAM 10 1/3 23040 24 1 3 69696 17424
400 120 132 11 16QAM 10 1/3 23040 24 1 3 69696 17424
400 120 264 11 16QAM 10 1/3 46104 24 1 6 139392 34848
ETSI
A.2.3.7 CP-OFDM 64QAM

slots slots slots
Note 4)
50-200 60 1 11 64QAM 19 1/2 408 16 2 1 792 132
50 60 33 11 64QAM 19 1/2 13064 24 1 2 26136 4356
50 60 66 11 64QAM 19 1/2 26120 24 1 4 52272 8712
100 60 66 11 64QAM 19 1/2 26120 24 1 4 52272 8712
100 60 132 11 64QAM 19 1/2 53288 24 1 7 104544 17424
200 60 132 11 64QAM 19 1/2 53288 24 1 7 104544 17424
200 60 264 11 64QAM 19 1/2 106576 24 1 13 209088 34848
ETSI
slots slots slots
Note 4)
50-400 120 1 11 64QAM 19 1/2 408 16 2 1 792 132
50 120 16 11 64QAM 19 1/2 6400 24 1 1 12672 2112
50 120 32 11 64QAM 19 1/2 12808 24 1 2 25344 4224
100 120 33 11 64QAM 19 1/2 13064 24 1 2 26136 4356
100 120 66 11 64QAM 19 1/2 26120 24 1 4 52272 8712
200 120 66 11 64QAM 19 1/2 26120 24 1 4 52272 8712
200 120 132 11 64QAM 19 1/2 53288 24 1 7 104544 17424
400 120 132 11 64QAM 19 1/2 53288 24 1 7 104544 17424
400 120 264 11 64QAM 19 1/2 106576 24 1 13 209088 34848
ETSI
A.3 DL reference measurement channels
A.3.1 General
Unless otherwise stated, Tables A.3.3.2-1 and A.3.3.2-2 are applicable for measurements of the Receiver Characteristics
(clause 7).
Unless otherwise stated, Tables A.3.3.2-1 and A.3.3.2-2 also apply for the modulated interferer used in Clauses 7.5 and
7.6 with test specific bandwidths.
CSI-RS configuration parameter defined in Table A.3.1-2 is used for verifying the beam correspondence requirement, 2
slots of CSI-RS shall be provided at each test grid point. The DL channel shall be configured for zero power on all tones
except those used by CSI-RS in slots containing CSI-RS for beam refinement, and the DL and UL channel sizes shall be
the same during verification.
Table A.3.1-1: Test parameters
Parameter Unit Value

CORESET frequency domain allocation Full BW
CORESET time domain allocation 2 OFDM symbols at the begin of each slot
PDSCH mapping type Type A
PDSCH start symbol index (S) 2
Number of consecutive PDSCH symbols (L) 12
PDSCH PRB bundling PRBs 2
Dynamic PRB bundling false
MCS table for TBS determination 64QAM
Overhead value for TBS determination 0
First DMRS position for Type A PDSCH mapping 2
DMRS type Type 1
Number of additional DMRS 2
FDM between DMRS and PDSCH Disable
CSI-RS for tracking First subcarrier index in
the PRB used for CSI-RS 0 for CSI-RS resource 1,2
(k0)
OFDM symbols in the l0 = 8 for CSI-RS resource 1
PRB used for CSI-RS l0 = 12 for CSI-RS resource 2
Number of CSI-RS ports 1 for CSI-RS resource 1,2
CDM Type 'No CDM' for CSI-RS resource 1,2
Density (ρ) 3 for CSI-RS resource 1,2
CSI-RS periodicity Slots 60 kHz SCS: 80 for CSI-RS resources 1 and 2
120 kHz SCS: 160 for CSI-RS resources 1 and 2
CSI-RS offset Slots 60 kHz SCS: 40 for CSI-RS resources 1 and 2
120kHz SCS: 80 for CSI-RS resources 1 and 2
Frequency Occupation Start PRB 0
Number of PRB = BWP size
QCL info TCI state #0
PTRS configuration PTRS is not configured
ETSI
Table A.3.1-2: CSI-RS parameters
Resource Type aperiodic

Resource Set Config
repetition on
aperiodicTriggeringOffset Depending on UE capability
Resource Config
30 for resource #0
31 for resource #1
32 for resource #2
33 for resource #3
nzp-CSI-RS-ResourceId
34 for resource #4
35 for resource #5
36 for resource #6
37 for resource #7
powerControlOffset 0
powerControlOffsetSS db0
nrofPorts 1
6 for resource #0
7 for resource #1
8 for resource #2
9 for resource #3
firstOFDMSymbolInTimeDomain
10 for resource #4
11 for resource #5
12 for resource #6
13 for resource #7
cdm-Type noCDM
density 3
48 for channel
bandwidth≥100MHz
nrofRBs
32 for channel
bandwidth=50MHz
qcl-info Type D to SSB
ETSI
A.3.2 Void
A.3.3 DL reference measurement channels for TDD

A.3.3.1 General
Table A.3.3.1-1. Additional test parameters for TDD
Value
Parameter
SCS 60 kHz (µ=2) SCS 120 kHz (µ=3)
TDD Slot Configuration pattern (Note 1) DDDSU DDDSU
Special Slot Configuration (Note 2) S=4D+6G+4U S=10D+2G+2U
referenceSubcarrierSpacing 60 kHz 120 kHz
UL-DL dl-UL- 1.25 ms 0.625 ms
configuration TransmissionPeriodicity
nrofDownlinkSlots 3 3
nrofDownlinkSymbols 4 10
nrofUplinkSlot 1 1
nrofUplinkSymbols 4 2
Number of HARQ Processes 8 8
The number of slots between PDSCH and K1 = 4 if mod(i,5) = 0 K1 = 4 if mod(i,5) = 0
corresponding HARQ-ACK information (Note 3) K1 =3 if mod(i,5) = 1 K1 =3 if mod(i,5) = 1
K1 =7 if mod(i,5) = 2 K1 =7 if mod(i,5) = 2
where i is slot index per frame; where i is slot index per frame;
i = {0,…,39} i = {0,…,79}
NOTE 1: D denotes a slot with all DL symbols; S denotes a slot with a mix of DL, UL and guard symbols; U denotes
a slot with all UL symbols. The field is for information.
NOTE 2: D, G, U denote DL, guard and UL symbols, respectively. The field is for information.
NOTE 3: i is the slot index per frame.
ETSI
A.3.3.2 FRC for receiver requirements for QPSK

Table A.3.3.2-1 Fixed Reference Channel for Receiver Requirements (SCS 60 kHz, TDD)
Channel bandwidth MHz 50 100 200
Subcarrier spacing configuration

μ 2 2 2
Allocated resource blocks 66 132 264
Subcarriers per resource block 12 12 12
Allocated slots per Frame 23 23 23
MCS index 4 4 4
Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK
Target Coding Rate 1/3 1/3 1/3
Maximum number of HARQ transmissions 1 1 1
Information Bit Payload per Slot
For Slots 0 and Slot i, if mod(i, 5) = {3,4}
Bits N/A N/A N/A
for i from {0,…,79} (NOTE 5)
For Slot i, if mod(i, 5) = {0,1,2} for i from
Bits 4224 8456 16896
{1,…,79} (NOTE 6)
Transport block CRC Bits 24 24 24
LDPC base graph 1 1 1
Number of Code Blocks per Slot
CBs N/A N/A N/A
CBs 1 2 2
{1,…,79} (NOTE 6)
Binary Channel Bits Per Slot
Bits N/A N/A N/A
Bits 10.138 20.294 40.550
{1,…,79} (NOTE 6)
Max. Throughput averaged over 1 frame Mbps 9.715 19.449 38.861
NOTE 1: Additional parameters are specified in Table A.3.1-1 and Table A.3.3.1-1.
NOTE 2: If more than one Code Block is present, an additional CRC sequence of L = 24 Bits
is attached to each Code Block (otherwise L = 0 Bit).
NOTE 3: SS/PBCH block is transmitted in slot 0 with periodicity 20 ms
NOTE 4: Slot i is slot index per 2 frames
NOTE 5: When this DL RMC used together with the UL RMC for the transmitter requirements
requiring at least one sub frame (1ms) for the measurement period, Slot i, if mod(i,
8) = {3,4,5,6,7} for i from {0,…,79} together with the TDD UL-DL configuration
specified in A2.3.
NOTE 6: When this DL RMC used together with the UL RMC for the transmitter requirements
requiring at least one sub frame (1ms) for the measurement period, Slot i, if mod(i,
8) = {0,1,2} for i from {0,…,79} together with the TDD UL-DL configuration specified
in A2.3.
ETSI
Channel bandwidth MHz 50 100 200 400

μ 3 3 3 3
Allocated resource blocks 32 66 132 264
Subcarriers per resource block 12 12 12 12
Allocated slots per Frame 47 47 47 47
MCS index 4 4 4 4
Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK
Target Coding Rate 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3
Maximum number of HARQ transmissions 1 1 1 1
Bits N/A N/A N/A N/A
Bits 2088 4224 8456 16896
{1,…,159} (NOTE 6)
Transport block CRC Bits 16 24 24 24
LDPC base graph 2 1 1 1
CBs N/A N/A N/A N/A
CBs 1 1 2 2
{1,…,159} (NOTE 6)
Bits 6912 14256 28512 57024
{1,…,159} (NOTE 6)
Max. Throughput averaged over 1 frame Mbps 10.022 20.275 40.589 81.101
NOTE 2: If more than one Code Block is present, an additional CRC sequence of L = 24 Bits is
attached to each Code Block (otherwise L = 0 Bit).
NOTE 5: When this DL RMC used together with the UL RMC for the transmitter requirements requiring
at least one sub frame (1ms) for the measurement period, Slot i, if mod(i, 16) = {7,…,15} for i
from {0,…,159} together with the TDD UL-DL configuration specified in A2.3.
NOTE 6: When this DL RMC used together with the UL RMC for the transmitter requirements requiring
at least one sub frame (1ms) for the measurement period, Slot i, if mod(i, 16) = {0,…,6} for i
from {0,…,159} together with the TDD UL-DL configuration specified in A2.3.
A.3.3.3 FRC for receiver requirements for 16QAM
ETSI


μ 2 2 2
MCS index 19 19 19
Modulation 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM
Bits N/A N/A N/A
for i from {0,…,79}
Bits 20496 40976 81976
{1,…,79}
CBs N/A N/A N/A
{1,…,79}
CBs 3 5 10
{1,…,79}
Bits N/A N/A N/A
Bits 40986 81972 163944
{1,…,79}
NOTE 5: PTRS is configured on symbols containing PDSCH with 1 port, per 2PRB in
frequency domain, per symbol in time domain. Overhead for TBS calculation is
assumed to be 6.
ETSI

μ 3 3 3 3
MCS index 19 19 19 19
Modulation 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM 64QAM
Bits 9992 20496 40976 81976
{1,…,159}
CBs N/A N/A N/A N/A
CBs 2 3 5 10
{1,…,159}
Bits 19872 40986 81972 163944
{1,…,159}
NOTE 3: SS/PBCH block is transmitted in slot 0 of each frame
NOTE 4: Slot i is slot index per frame
NOTE 5: PTRS is configured on symbols containing PDSCH with 1 port, per 2PRB in frequency
domain, per symbol in time domain. Overhead for TBS calculation is assumed to be 6.
ETSI


μ 2 2 2
MCS index 24 24 24
Modulation 256QAM 256QAM 256QAM
Bits N/A N/A N/A
Bits 44040 88064 176208
{1,…,79}
CBs N/A N/A N/A
CBs 6 11 21
{1,…,79}
Bits N/A N/A N/A
Bits 54648 109296 218592
{1,…,79}
NOTE 5: PTRS is configured on symbols containing PDSCH with 1 port, per 2PRB in
frequency domain, per symbol in time domain. Overhead for TBS calculation is
assumed to be 6.
ETSI

μ 3 3 3 3
MCS index 24 24 24 24
Modulation 256QAM 256QAM 256QAM 256QAM
Bits 21504 44040 88064 176208
{1,…,159}
CBs N/A N/A N/A N/A
CBs 3 6 11 21
{1,…,159}
Bits 26496 54648 109296 218592
{1,…,159}
NOTE 5: PTRS is configured on symbols containing PDSCH with 1 port, per 2PRB in frequency
domain, per symbol in time domain. Overhead for TBS calculation is assumed to be 6.
ETSI
A.4 Void
A.5 OFDMA Channel Noise Generator (OCNG)

A.5.1 OCNG Patterns for FDD
A.5.2 OCNG Patterns for TDD
A.5.2.1 OCNG TDD pattern 1: Generic OCNG TDD Pattern for all unused REs
Table A.5.2.1-1: OP.1 TDD: Generic OCNG TDD Pattern for all unused REs
OCNG Appliance Control Region Data Region

OCNG Parameters (Core Set)
Resources allocated All unused REs (Note 1) All unused REs (Note 2)
Structure PDCCH PDSCH
Content Uncorrelated pseudo random Uncorrelated pseudo random QPSK
QPSK modulated data modulated data
Transmission scheme for multiple Single Tx port transmission Spatial multiplexing using any
antennas ports transmission precoding matrix with dimensions
same as the precoding matrix for
PDSCH
Subcarrier Spacing Same as for RMC PDCCH in Same as for RMC PDSCH in the
the active BWP active BWP
Power Level Same as for RMC PDCCH Same as for RMC PDSCH
Note 1: All unused REs in the active CORESETS appointed by the search spaces in use.
Note 2: Unused available REs refer to REs in PRBs not allocated for any physical channels, CORESETs,
synchronization signals or reference signals in channel bandwidth.
ETSI
Annex B (informative): Void
ETSI
Annex C (normative):
Downlink physical channels
C.1 General
C.2 Setup
Table C.2-1 describes the downlink Physical Channels that are required for connection set up.
Table C.2-1: Downlink Physical Channels required

for connection set-up
Physical Channel
PBCH
SSS
PSS
PDCCH
PDSCH
PBCH DMRS
PDCCH DMRS
PDSCH DMRS
CSI-RS
PTRS
C.3 Connection
C.3.1 Measurement of Receiver Characteristics

Unless otherwise stated, Table C.3.1-1 is applicable for measurements on the Receiver Characteristics (clause 7).
Table C.3.1-1: Downlink Physical Channels transmitted during a connection (TDD)

SSS transmit power W Test specific
EPRE ratio of PSS to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PBCH to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PBCH to PBCH DMRS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PDCCH to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PDCCH to PDCCH DMRS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PDSCH to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PDSCH to PDSCH DMRS (Note 1) dB -3
EPRE ratio of CSI-RS to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of PTRS to PDSCH dB Test specific
EPRE ratio of OCNG DMRS to SSS dB 0
EPRE ratio of OCNG to OCNG DMRS (Note 1) dB 0
Note 1: No boosting is applied to any of the channels except PDSCH DMRS. For PDSCH DMRS, 3 dB power
boosting is applied assuming DMRS Type 1 configuration when DMRS and PDSCH are TDM'ed and only
half of the DMRS REs are occupied.
Note 2: Number of DMRS CDM groups without data for PDSCH DMRS configuration for OCNG is set to 1.
ETSI
Annex D (normative):
Characteristics of the interfering signal
D.1 General
Unless otherwise stated, a modulated full bandwidth NR downlink signal, which equals to channel bandwidth of the
wanted signal for Single Carrier case is used as interfering signals when RF performance requirements for NR UE
receiver are defined. For intra-band contiguous CA case, a modulated NR downlink signal which equals to the
aggregated channel bandwidth of the wanted signal is used.
D.2 Interference signals

Table D.2-1 describes the modulated interferer for different channel bandwidth options.
Table D.2-1: Description of modulated NR interferer

Channel bandwidth for Single Carrier Intra band
50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz contiguous CA
BW Interferer 50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 400MHz BW Channel_CA
RB NOTE1
NOTE 1: The RB configured for interfering signal is the same as maximum RB number
defined in Table 5.3.2-1 for each sub-carrier spacing.
ETSI
Annex E (normative):
Environmental conditions
E.1 General
This annex specifies the environmental requirements of the UE. Within these limits the requirements of the present
documents shall be fulfilled.
E.2 Environmental
The requirements in this clause apply to all types of UE(s).
E.2.1 Temperature
All RF requirements for UEs operating in FR2 are defined over the air and can only be tested in an OTA chamber.
The UE shall fulfil all the requirements in the temperature range for extreme conditions, as defined in Table E.2.1-1,
unless explicitly stated otherwise in any requirement.
Table E.2.1-1: Temperature conditions
+ 25 ⁰C ± 10 ⁰C For normal (room temperature) conditions with relative

humidity of 25 % to 75 %
-10°C to +55°C For extreme conditions
Outside this temperature range the UE, if powered on, shall not make ineffective use of the radio frequency spectrum.
In no case shall the UE exceed the transmitted levels as defined in clause 6.2 for extreme operation.
E.2.2 Voltage
Editor's note: This requirement is incomplete. The following aspects are either missing or not yet determined:
Methodology to control the voltage in a case which a power cable is not connected to DUT is FFS since it is not
agreed whether we can connect the power cable to DUT at the OTA measurement situation yet.
The UE shall fulfil all the requirements in the full voltage range, i.e. the voltage range between the extreme voltages.
The manufacturer shall declare the lower and higher extreme voltages and the approximate shutdown voltage. For the
equipment that can be operated from one or more of the power sources listed below, the lower extreme voltage shall not
be higher, and the higher extreme voltage shall not be lower than that specified below.
Table E.2.2-1: Voltage conditions

Power source Lower extreme Higher extreme Normal conditions
voltage voltage voltage
AC mains 0,9 * nominal 1,1 * nominal nominal
Regulated lead acid battery 0,9 * nominal 1,3 * nominal 1,1 * nominal
Nonregulated batteries:
Leclanché 0,85 * nominal Nominal Nominal
Lithium 0,95 * nominal 1,1 * Nominal 1,1 * Nominal
Mercury/nickel & cadmium 0,90 * nominal Nominal
ETSI
Outside this voltage range the UE if powered on, shall not make ineffective use of the radio frequency spectrum. In no
case shall the UE exceed the transmitted levels as defined in clause 6.2 for extreme operation. In particular, the UE shall
inhibit all RF transmissions when the power supply voltage is below the manufacturer declared shutdown voltage.
E.2.3 Void
ETSI
Annex F (normative):
Transmit modulation
F.1 Measurement Point

Figure F.1-1 shows the measurement point for the unwanted emission falling into non-allocated RB(s) and the EVM for
the allocated RB(s).
DFT-s-OFDM DUT Test equipment

PUSCH, PUCCH
DFT
Tone Tx-Rx chain DFT-s-OFDM
IDFT
map equalizer PUSCH,
PUCCH
TX RF
0 IFFT Front--end Channel FFT
correction
In-band CP-OFDM
CP-OFDM emissions PUSCH, PUCCH
PUSCH, meas. and DM-RS
PUCCH and
0
DM-RS
Figure F.1-1: EVM measurement points
F.2 Basic Error Vector Magnitude measurement

The EVM is the difference between the ideal waveform and the measured waveform for the allocated RB(s)
 z ' (v ) − i(v )
2
v∈Tm
EVM = ,
Tm ⋅ P0
where
Tm is a set of Tm modulation symbols with the considered modulation scheme being active within the measurement
period,
z'(v) are the samples of the signal evaluated for the EVM,
i(v) is the ideal signal reconstructed by the measurement equipment, and

P0 is the average power of the ideal signal. For normalized modulation symbols P0 is equal to 1.
The basic EVM measurement interval is defined over one slot in the time domain for PUCCH and PUSCH and over one
preamble sequence for the PRACH.
F.3 Basic in-band emissions measurement

The in-band emissions are a measure of the interference falling into the non-allocated resources blocks. The in-band
emission requirement is evaluated for PUCCH and PUSCH transmissions. The in-band emission requirement is not
evaluated for PRACH transmissions.
The in-band emissions are measured as follows
ETSI
 1 f l + (12 ⋅ Δ RB +11)*Δf
 
2
 Y (t , f ) , Δ RB < 0
 T
Emissions absolute (Δ RB ) =  s t∈Ts min(
max( f min , f l +12⋅ Δ RB * Δf )
f max , f h +12 ⋅ Δ RB * Δf ) ,
1 
 Ts t∈Ts f h + (12⋅ Δ
2
Y (t , f ) , Δ RB > 0
RB −11) * Δf
where
Ts is a set of T s OFDM symbols with the considered modulation scheme being active within the measurement
period,
Δ RB is the starting frequency offset between the allocated RB and the measured non-allocated RB (e.g. ΔRB =1 or
ΔRB = −1 for the first adjacent RB),
f min (resp. f max ) is the lower (resp. upper) edge of the UL system BW,
fl and fh are the lower and upper edge of the allocated BW, and
Y (t , f ) is the frequency domain signal evaluated for in-band emissions as defined in the clause (ii)
The relative in-band emissions are, given by
Emissionsabsolute(Δ RB )
Emissionsrelative(Δ RB ) = fl +(12⋅NRB −1)Δf
1
 
2
Y (t , f )
Ts ⋅ N RB t∈Ts fl
where
NRB is the number of allocated RBs

The basic in-band emissions measurement interval is defined over one slot in the time domain. When the PUSCH or
PUCCH transmission slot is shortened due to multiplexing with SRS, the in-band emissions measurement interval is
reduced by one OFDM symbol, accordingly.
~ ~
In the evaluation of in-band emissions, the timing is set according to Δt = Δc~ , where sample time offsets Δ t and
Δc~ are defined in clause F.4.
F.4 Modified signal under test

Implicit in the definition of EVM is an assumption that the receiver is able to compensate a number of transmitter
impairments.
The DFT-s-OFDM modulated signals or PRACH signal under test is modified and, in the case of DFT-s-OFDM
modulated signals, decoded according to:
Z ' (t , f ) = IDFT 
{
 FFT z(v − Δ~
~
~
} ~
t ) ⋅ e− j 2πΔfv .e j 2πfΔt 

 a~(t , f ) ⋅ e jϕ (t , f ) 
where
z (v ) is the time domain samples of the signal under test.
ETSI
The CP-OFDM modulated signals or PUSCH demodulation reference signal or CP-OFDM modulated signalsunder test
is equalised and, in the case of PUCCH data signal decoded according to:
Z ' (t , f ) =
{ ~
~
}~ ~
FFT z (v − Δ t ) ⋅ e − j 2πΔfv .e j 2πfΔ t
a~ (t , f ) ⋅ e jϕ (t , f )
where
z (v ) is the time domain samples of the signal under test.
To minimize the error, the signal under test should be modified with respect to a set of parameters following the
procedure explained below.
Notation:
~
Δt is the sample timing difference between the FFT processing window in relation to nominal timing of the ideal
signal.
~
Δf is the RF frequency offset.
ϕ~(t, f ) is the phase response of the TX chain.

a~(t, f ) is the amplitude response of the TX chain.
In the following Δc~ represents the middle sample of the EVM window of length W (defined in the next clauses) or
the last sample of the first window half if W is even.
The EVM analyser shall
~ ~
- detect the start of each slot and estimate Δt and Δf ,
- determine Δc~ so that the EVM window of length W is centred
- on the time interval determined by the measured cyclic prefix minus 16κ samples of the considered OFDM
symbol for symbol l for subcarrier spacing configuration µ in a subframe, with l = 0 or l = 7*2^µ for normal CP,
i.e. the first 16κ samples of the CP should not be taken into account for this step. In the determination of the
number of excluded samples, a sampling rate of 1/Tc is assumed. If a different sampling rate is used, the number
of excluded samples is scaled linearly.
- on the measured cyclic prefix of the considered OFDM symbol symbol for all other symbols for normal CP and
for symbol 0 to 11 for extended CP.
- on the measured preamble cyclic prefix for the PRACH
To determine the other parameters a sample timing offset equal to Δc~ is corrected from the signal under test. The
EVM analyser shall then
~
- correct the RF frequency offset Δ f for each time slot, and
- apply an FFT of appropriate size. The chosen FFT size shall ensure that in the case of an ideal signal under test,
there is no measured inter-subcarrier interference.
The carrier leakage shall be removed from the evaluated signal before calculating the EVM and the in-band emissions;
however, the removed relative carrier leakage power also has to satisfy the applicable requirement.
At this stage the allocated RBs shall be separated from the non-allocated RBs. In the case of PUCCH and PUSCH
EVM, the signal on the non-allocated RB(s), Y (t , f ) , is used to evaluate the in-band emissions.
ETSI
Moreover, the following procedure applies only to the signal on the allocated RB(s).
- In the case of PUCCH and PUSCH, the UL EVM analyzer shall estimate the TX chain equalizer coefficients
a~(t, f ) and ϕ~(t, f ) used by the ZF equalizer for all subcarriers by time averaging at each signal subcarrier of
the amplitude and phase of the reference and data symbols. The time-averaging length is 1 slot. This process
creates an average amplitude and phase for each signal subcarrier used by the ZF equalizer. The knowledge of
data modulation symbols may be required in this step because the determination of symbols by demodulation is
not reliable before signal equalization.
-
~ ϕ~
In the case of PRACH, the UL EVM analyzer shall estimate the TX chain coefficients a (t ) and (t) used for
phase and amplitude correction and are seleted so as to minimize the resulting EVM. The TX chain coefficients
are not dependent on frequency, i.e. a~(t, f ) = a~(t) and ϕ~(t, f ) = ϕ~(t) . The TX chain coefficient are
~
chosen independently for each preamble transmission and for each Δt .
At this stage estimates of

~ ~ ~
Δ f , a(t, f ) , ϕ(t, f ) and Δc~ are available. Δ ~
t is one of the extremities of the
~ W  W 
window W , i.e. Δ t can be Δc~ + α −   or Δc~ +   , where α = 0 if W is odd and α = 1 if W is even.
2 2
The EVM analyser shall then
~ W 
- calculate EVMl with Δt set to Δc~ + α −   ,
2
~ W 
- calculate EVMh with Δt set to Δc~ +   .
2
F.5 Window length
F.5.1 Timing offset

~
As a result of using a cyclic prefix, there is a range of Δ t , which, at least in the case of perfect Tx signal quality,
would give close to minimum error vector magnitude. As a first order approximation, that range should be equal to the
length of the cyclic prefix. Any time domain windowing or FIR pulse shaping applied by the transmitter reduces the
~
Δ t range within which the error vector is close to its minimum.
F.5.2 Window length

The window length W affects the measured EVM and is expressed as a function of the configured cyclic prefix length.
In the case where equalization is present, as with frequency domain EVM computation, the effect of FIR is reduced.
This is because the equalization can correct most of the linear distortion introduced by the FIR. However, the time
domain windowing effect can't be removed.
F.5.3 Window length for normal CP

Table F.5.3-1 and Table F.5.3-2 below specify the EVM window length (W) for normal CP for FR2.
ETSI
Table F.5.3-1: EVM window length for normal CP for 60 kHz SCS
Ratio of
Channel Cyclic prefix EVM W to
Bandwidth FFT size length in FFT window total CP
(MHz) samples length W length 1
(%)
50 1024 72 36 50
100 2048 144 72 50
200 4096 288 144 50
Note 1: These percentages are informative and apply to all
OFDM symbols within subframe except for symbol 0 of
slot 0 and slot 2. Symbol 0 of slot 0 and slot 2 may have
a longer CP and therefore a lower percentage.
Table F.5.3-2: EVM window length for normal CP for 120 kHz SCS
Ratio of
(MHz) samples length W length 1
(%)
50 512 36 18 50
100 1024 72 36 50
200 2048 144 72 50
400 4096 288 144 50
Note 1: These percentages are informative and apply to all
OFDM symbols within subframe except for symbol 0 of
slot 0 and slot 4. Symbol 0 of slot 0 and slot 4 may have
a longer CP and therefore a lower percentage.
F.5.4 Window length for Extended CP

Table F.5.4-1 below specifies the EVM window length (W) for extended CP. The number of CP samples excluded from
the EVM window is the same as for normal CP length.
Table F.5.4-1: EVM window length for extended CP for 60 kHz SCS
Ratio of
(MHz) samples length W length1
(%)
50 1024 256 220 85.9
100 2048 512 440 85.9
200 4096 1024 880 85.9
Note 1: These percentages are informative.
F.5.5 Window length for PRACH

The table below specifies the EVM window length for PRACH preamble formats for LRA = 139 and
Δf RA = 15⋅ 2μ kHz μ ∈ {2 ,3} .
where
ETSI
Table F.5.5-1: EVM window length for PRACH formats for LRA = 139
Cyclic
prefix EVM window
Preamble Nominal Ratio of W
length W in
format Ncp FFT size1 to CP2
FFT samples
length
A1 1152⋅2-μ 8192⋅2-μ 576⋅2-μ 50.0%
-μ μ
A2 2304⋅2 8192⋅2 - 1728⋅2-μ 75.0%
A3 3456⋅2-μ 8192⋅2-μ 2880⋅2-μ 83.3%
B1 864⋅2-μ 8192⋅2-μ 288⋅2-μ 33.3%
B2 1440⋅2-μ 8192⋅2-μ 864⋅2-μ 60.0%
B3 2016⋅2-μ 8192⋅2-μ 1440⋅2-μ 71.4%
B4 3744⋅2-μ 8192⋅2-μ 3168⋅2-μ 84.6%
-μ μ
C0 4960⋅2 8192⋅2 - 4384⋅2-μ 88.4%
C2 8192⋅2-μ 8192⋅2-μ 7616⋅2-μ 93.0%
Note 1: The use of other FFT sizes is possible as long as appropriate
scaling of the window length is applied
Note 2: These percentages are informative
F.6 Averaged EVM

The general EVM is averaged over basic EVM measurements for n slots in the time domain.
1 n
EVM = 
n i =1
EVM i2 ,
where n is
݊=൜
40, ݂‫ ݎ݋‬60 ݇‫ܵܥܵ ݖܪ‬
80, ݂‫ ݎ݋‬120 ݇‫ܵܥܵ ݖܪ‬
for PUCCH, PUSCH.
The EVM requirements shall be tested against the maximum of the RMS average at the window W extremities of the
EVM measurements:
Thus EVMl is calculated using Δ ~t = Δ ~tl in the expressions above and EVMh is calculated using Δ ~t = Δ ~th .
Thus we get:
EVM = max(EVMl , EVMh )
The calculation of the EVM for the demodulation reference signal, EVMDMRS , follows the same procedure as
calculating the general EVM, with the exception that the modulation symbol set Tm defined in clause F.2 is restricted
to symbols containing uplink demodulation reference signals.
The basic EVMDMRS measurements are first averaged over n slots in the time domain to obtain an intermediate
average EVMDMRS.
௡
1
‫ܯܸܧ‬஽ெோௌ = ඩ݊ ෍ ‫ܯܸܧ‬஽ெோௌ
ଶ
௜ ,
௜ୀଵ
ETSI
EVM DMRS , i ~ ~
In the determination of each , the timing is set to Δ t = Δ tl if EVMl > EVMh , and it is set to
~ ~
Δ t = Δ th otherwise, where EVMl and EVMh are the general average EVM values calculated in the same n slots
over which the intermediate average EVM DMRS is calculated. Note that in some cases, the general average EVM may
be calculated only for the purpose of timing selection for the demodulation reference signal EVM.
Then the results are further averaged to get the EVM for the demodulation reference signal, EVM DMRS ,
1 6

2
EVMDMRS = EVM DMRS, j
6 j =1
The PRACH EVM, EVMPRACH , is averaged over 2 preamble sequence measurements for long preamble formats as
defined in table 6.3.3.1-1 in [9] and averaged over 10 preamble sequence measurements for short preamble formats as
defined in table 6.3.3.1-2 in [9]..
The EVM requirements shall be tested against the maximum of the RMS average at the window W extremities of the
EVM measurements:
~ ~ ~ ~
Thus EVMPRACH,l is calculated using Δ t = Δ tl and EVM PRACH,h is calculated using Δ t = Δ th .
Thus we get:
EVM PRACH = max(EVM PRACH, l , EVM PRACH, h )
F.7 Spectrum Flatness

The data shall be taken from FFT coded data symbols and the demodulation reference symbols of the allocated resource
block.
ETSI
Annex G (informative): Void
ETSI
Annex H (Normative)
Modified MPR behavior
H.1 Indication of modified MPR behavior

This annex contains the definitions of the bits in the field modifiedMPR-Behavior indicated per supported NR band in
the IE RF-Parameters [7] by a UE supporting an MPR or A-MPR modified in a given version of this specification. A
modified MPR or A-MPR behaviour can apply to a supported NR band in stand-alone operation (including CA and
NN-DC operation) or in non-standalone operation with the said NR band as part of an EN-DC or NE-DC band
combination.
NOTE 1: In the present release, the modifiedMPR-Behavior is indicated [7] by an 8-bit bitmap per supported NR band.
Table H.1-1: Definitions of the bits in the field modifiedMPRbehavior

NR Band Index of field Definition Notes
(bit number) (description of the supported functionality if
indicator set to one)
- FR2 power class 3 MPR as defined in clause - This bit may be set to 1 by
n257 0 (leftmost bit)
6.2.2.3 of 38.101-2 v16.2.0 a UE supporting n257
ETSI
Annex H (normative): Modified MPR behavior
H.1 Indication of modified MPR behavior

This annex contains the definitions of the bits in the field modifiedMPR-Behavior indicated per supported NR band in
the IE RF-Parameters [7] by a UE supporting an MPR or A-MPR modified in a given version of this specification. A
modified MPR or A-MPR behaviour can apply to a supported NR band in stand-alone operation (including CA and
NN-DC operation) or in non-standalone operation with the said NR band as part of an EN-DC or NE-DC band
combination.
NOTE 1: In the present release, the modifiedMPR-Behavior is indicated [7] by an 8-bit bitmap per supported NR
band.
Table H.1-1: Definitions of the bits in the field modifiedMPRbehavior

NR Band Index of field Definition Notes
(bit number) (description of the supported functionality if indicator
set to one)
n258 0 (leftmost bit) - AMPR for NS_201 as defined in clausue 6.2.3.2 of - This bit may be set to 1 by
38.101-2 v15.7.0 a UE supporting n258
ETSI
Annex I (informative): Void
ETSI
Annex J (normative):
UE coordinate system
J.1 Reference coordinate system

This annex defines the measurement coordinate system for the NR UE. The reference coordinate system as defined in
IEEE Std 149 [15] is provided in Figure J.1-1 below while Figure J.1.-2 shows the DUT in the default alignment, i.e.,
the DUT and the reference coordinate systems are aligned with α = 0o and β = 0o and γ = 0o where α, β, and γ describe
the relative angles between the two coordinate systems.
Figure J.1-1: Reference coordinate system
ETSI
Figure J.1-2: DUT default alignment to coordinate system
The following aspects are necessary:
- A basic understanding of the top and bottom of the device is needed in order to define unambiguous DUT
positioning requirements for the test, e.g., in the drawings used in this annex, the three buttons are on the bottom
of the device (front) and the camera is on the top of the device (back).
- An understanding of the origin and alignment the coordinate system inside the test system i.e. the directions in
which the x, y, z -axes points inside the test chamber is needed in order to define unambiguous DUT orientation,
DUT beam, signal, interference, and measurement angles
J.2 Test conditions and angle definitions

Tables J.2-1 through J.2-3 below provides the test conditions and angle definitions for three permitted device alignment
for the default test condition, DUT orientation 1, and two different options for each permitted device alignment to re-
position the device for DUT Orientation 2 as outlined in Figures J.2-1 and J.2-3.
ETSI
Table J.2-1: Test conditions and angle definitions for Alignment Option 1
Test DUT Link Measurement
Diagram
condition orientation angle angle
θLink; θMeas;
ϕLink ϕMeas
Free space
α = 0º; with with
DUT
β = 0º; polarization polarization
Orientation 1
γ = 0º reference reference
(default)
PolLink = θ or PolMeas = θ or
ϕ ϕ
Free space θLink; θMeas;

DUT α = 180º; ϕLink ϕMeas
Orientation 2 – β = 0º; with with
Option 1 γ = 0º polarization polarization
(based on re- reference reference
positioning PolLink = θ or PolMeas = θ or
approach) ϕ ϕ

approach) ϕ ϕ
NOTE 1: A polarization reference, as defined in relation to the reference coordinate system in J.1-1, is maintained for
each signal angle, link or interferer angle, and measurement angle.
NOTE 2: The combination of rotations is captured by matrix M=Rz(γ)•Ry(β)•Rx(α)
ETSI
Diagram
θLink; θMeas;
α = 0º; ϕLink ϕMeas
Free space
β = -90º; with with
DUT
γ = 0º polarization polarization
Orientation 1
reference reference
(default)
ϕ ϕ

approach) ϕ ϕ

approach) ϕ ϕ
ETSI
Diagram
θLink; θMeas;
α = 90º; ϕLink ϕMeas
Free space
β = 0º; with with
DUT
γ = 0º polarization polarization
Orientation 1
reference reference
(default)
ϕ ϕ

DUT α = -90º; ϕLink ϕMeas
Orientation 2 β = 0º; with with
– Option 1 γ = 0º polarization polarization
approach) ϕ ϕ

Orientation 2 β = 180º; with with
– Option 2 γ = 0º polarization polarization
approach) ϕ ϕ
For each UE requirement and test case, each of the parameters in Table J.2-1 through J.2-3 need to be recorded, such
that DUT positioning, DUT beam direction, and angles of the signal, link/interferer, and measurement are specified in
terms of the fixed coordinate system.
Due to the non-commutative nature of rotations, the order of rotations is important and needs to be defined when
multiple DUT orientations are tested.
The rotations around the x, y, and z axes can be defined with the following rotation matrices
1 0 0 0
0 cos α − sin α 0
Rx (α ) = 
0 sin α cos α 0
 
0 0 0 1
ETSI
 cos β 0 sin β 0
 0 1 0 0 
Ry ( β ) = 
 − sin β 0 cos β 0
 
 0 0 0 1
and
 cos γ − sin γ 0 0
 sin γ cos γ 0 0 
Rz (γ ) = 
 0 0 1 0
 
 0 0 0 1 .
with the respective angles of rotation, α, β, γ, and
 x ' x
 y '  
  = R  y
 z ' z
   
1 1
Additionally, any translation of the DUT can be defined with the translation matrix
1 0 0 tx 
0 1 0 t y 
T (t x , t y , t z ) = 
0 0 1 tz 
 
0 0 0 1
with offsets tx, ty, tz in x, y, and z, respectively and with
 x '  x
 y '  
  = T  y
 z ' z
   
1 1
The combination of rotations and translation is captured by the multiplication of rotation and translation matrices.
For instance, the matrix M
‫ܶ = ܯ‬൫‫ݐ‬௫ , ‫ݐ‬௬ , ‫ݐ‬௭ ൯ · ܴ௭ ሺߛሻ · ܴ௬ ሺߚሻ · ܴ௫ ሺߙሻ

describes an initial rotation of the DUT around the x axis with angle α, a subsequent rotation around the y axis with
angle β, and a final rotation around the z axis with angle γ. After those rotations, the DUT is translated by tx, ty, tz in x,
y, and z, respectively.
J.3 DUT positioning guidelines

The centre of the reference coordinate system shall be aligned with the geometric centre of the DUT in order to
minimize the offset between antenna arrays integrated at any position of the UE and the centre of the quiet zone.
ETSI
Near-field coupling effects between the antenna and the pedestals/positioners/fixtures generally cause increased signal
ripples. Re-positioning the DUT by directing the beam peak away from those areas can reduce the effect of signal ripple
on EIRP/EIS measurements. Figure J.3-1 and J.3-2 illustrate how to reposition the DUT in distributed axes and
combined axes system, when the beam peak is directed to the DUTs upper hemisphere (DUT orientation 1) or the
DUTs lower hemisphere (DUT orientation 2). While these figures are examples of different positioning systems and
other implementations are not precluded, the relative orientation of the coordinate system with respect to the
antennas/reflectors and the axes of rotation shall apply to any measurement setup.
Figure J.3-1: DUT re-positioning for an example of distributed-axes system
Figure J.3-2: DUT re-positioning for an example of combined-axes system
For EIRP/EIS measurements, re-positioning the DUT makes sure the pedestal is not obstructing the beam path and that
the pedestal is not in closer proximity to the measurement antenna/reflector than the DUT. For TRP measurements, re-
positioning the DUT makes sure that the beam peak direction is not obstructed by the pedestal and the pedestal is in the
measurement path only when measuring the back-hemisphere. No re-positioning during the TRP measurement is
required.
ETSI
Annex K (informative): Void
ETSI
Annex L (informative):
Change history
Change history
Date Meeting TDoc CR Rev Cat Subject/Comment New
versio
n
2017-08 RAN4#84 Initial Skeleton 0.0.1
2017-10 RAN4#84 R4- TPs from R4#84Bis by editors 0.1.0
Bis 1711979
2017-12 RAN4#85 R4- Approved TPs from R4#85 0.2.0
1713806 R4-1714537, TP for TS 38.101-2: Channel Bandwidth Definition,
Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1714115, TP for TS 38.101-2: Channel Arrangement, :
Qualcomm Incorporated (Note: this TP was further discussed and
edited in the reflector)
R4-1713205, TP on general parts for 38.101-2 NR FR, : Ericsson
R4-1712884, TP to TS38.101-2 on environmental conditions, Intel
Corporation
R4-1714018, TP to TS 38.101-2 for definition of UE RF
terminologies, Anritsu Corporation
R4-1714447, TP on UE power class for FR2, Intel Corporation
R4-1714372, TP to TS38.101-2 on EVM equalizer spectrum flatness
requirements, Intel Corporation
R4-1714330, TP to TR 38.101-02 v0.1.0: ON/OFF mask design for
NR UE transmissions for FR2, Ericsson
R4-1714364, TP to TR 38.101: NR UE transmit OFF power for FR2,
CATT
R4-1714347, TP to TS38.101-2 on spurious emissions requirements
for FR2, Intel Corporation (Note: this TP was further discussed and
edited in the reflector)
R4-1714456, TP on REFSENS for FR2, Intel Corporation
R4-1714337 TP to TS 38.101-2 ACS requirement for mmW
(section 7.5), Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1714338, TP to TS 38.101-2 IBB requirement for mmW (section
7.6.1), Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1714348, TP to TS38.101-2 on Rx spurious emissions for FR2,
Intel Corporation
Min power for EVM requirement according to R4-1711568, TP to TR
38.xxx - UE minimum transmit power for range 2, CATT
Band list according to R4-1714542, List of bands and band

combinations to be introduced into RAN4 NR core requirements by
December 2017, RAN4 Chairmen
2017-12 RAN4#85 R4- Further corrections and alignments with 38.104 after email review 0.3.0
1714570
2017-12 RAN#78 RP-172476 v1.0.0 submitted for plenary approval. Contents same as 0.3.0 1.0.0
2017-12 RAN#78 Approved by plenary – Rel-15 spec under change control 15.0.0
2018-03 RAN#79 RP-180264 0004 F Implementation of endorsed CR on to 38.101-2 15.1.0
Endorsed draft CRs in RAN4-NR-AH#1801
F: R4-1800918, Draft CR to 38.101-2 on channel bandwidth
corrections (5.3.5), Nokia
F: R4-1801097, Modification for TS38.101-2, CATT
F: R4-1801098 Draft CR for TS38.101-2: On requirement metrics.
Sumitomo Elec. Industries, Ltd
F: R4-1800401, Editorial corections to 38.101-2, Qualcomm
F: R4-1801122: Draft pCR for TS 38.101-2 version 15.0.0:
Remaining ON/OFF masks for FR2 NR UE transmissions, Ericsson
F: R4-1800418, Correction of NR SEM for FR2 table, vivo
F: R4-1800316 Draft CR to 38.101-2: Tx spurious emission for NR
FR2 (section 6.5.3 ), ZTE Corporation
F: R4-1800918 Draft CR to 38.101-2 on channel bandwidth
corrections (5.3.5), Nokia
F: R4-1801013, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Clarifications to UE spectrum
utilization section 5.3, Ericsson
F: R4-1801229, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Channel spacing for CA for
NR FR2(section 5.4.1.2), ZTE Corporation
F: R4-1801232, Correction CR for channel spacing:38.101-2,
Samsung
ETSI
F: R4-1801325, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2: Corrections on channel

raster calculation in section 5.4.2, ZTE Corporation
F: R4-1800860, Corrections of GSCN, Nokia
Endorsed draft CRs in RAN4#86
R4-1803054, Draft CR for new spec structure of 38.101-2, Ericsson

R4-1801446, Modification for NR UE time mask requirement for
FR2, CATT
R4-1801729, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Corrections to In-band blocking
requirements, Rohde & Schwarz
R4-1801967, CR on EVM spectrum flatness for FR2, Huawei
R4-1802339, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Clarifications on peak directions
and REFSENS, ROHDE & SCHWARZ
R4-1802567, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2: Clarification of mixed
numerology guardband size, Ericsson
R4-1803238, Draft CR for TS 38.101-2: ACLR requirement
clarification, Huawei
R4-1803365, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Clarification on REFSENS
Definition, ROHDE & SCHWARZ
R4-1803453, draft CR for introduction of completed band
combinations from 37.865-01-01 into 38.101-2, Ericsson
R4-1803566, Draft CR for TS 38.101-2: Sync raster offset in re-
farming bands (5.4.3), Ericsson
2018-06 RAN#80 RP-181262 0010 F CR to TS 38.101-2: Implementation of endorsed draft CRs from 15.2.0
RAN4 #86bis and RAN4 #87
Endorsed draft CRs from RAN4#86Bis

R4-1803736, Draft CR on channel raster entry of band n258 for TS
38.101-2, ZTE Wistron Telecom AB
R4-1804022, CR for modifications and clarifications for NR FR2 CA
BW Classes, Nokia
R4-1804585, Draft CR to 38.101-2: IBE Section Update, Qualcomm,
Inc.
R4-1804657, Introduction of UE to UE coexistence requirements
requirements for FR2, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1804949, Corrections to 5.3.3 in TS 38.101-2, Nokia
R4-1805641, Corrections of BCS for n257 intraband contiguous CA
in 38.101-2, Nokia
R4-1805685, Draft CR to TS38.101-2: Channel Raster to Resource
Element Mapping (Section 5.4.2.2) and RB alignment with different
numerologies (Section 5.3.4), ZTE Corporation
R4-1805704, Update of UE emission requirements for FR2,
R4-1805705, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Update of section 7.1, Rohde &
Schwarz
R4-1805757, Update of ACS requirement for FR2, Qualcomm
Incorporated
R4-1805771, Update of IBB requirement for FR2, Qualcomm
Incorporated
R4-1805775, draft CR for TS 38.101-2 on US 28 GHz band number,
R4-1805949, Draft CR on minimum guardband of SCS 240 kHz SSB
for TS 38.101-2, ZTE Wistron Telecom AB
R4-1805982, draft CR for 38.101-2: sync raster, Samsung
R4-1804878, draft CR introduction completed band combinations
37.865-01-01 -> 38.101-2, Ericsson
R4-1803628, pi/2 BPSK related CR, IITH
Endorsed draft CRs from RAN#87
R4-1806167, Draft CR on channel raster entry of band n261 for TS

38.101-2, ZTE Corporation
R4-1806169, Draft CR on SSB clarification for TS 38.101-2, ZTE
Corporation
R4-1806383, Draft CR of clarifications on TRx RF test metrics for
mmWave, Anritsu Corporation
R4-1806946, Draft CR for TS 38.101-2: Channel raster and NR-
ARFCN clarification (5.4.2), Ericsson
R4-1807652, FR2 UE ACLR requirement for CA, Qualcomm
R4-1807655, Further refinements for UE Rx requirements in FR2,
Qualcomm
R4-1807681, Draft CR on 38.101-2 on channel raster to achieve
alignment of data and SSB subcarrier grids, Nokia
R4-1807853, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2: UE maximum output power
for UL CA, Nokia
ETSI
R4-1807855, Draft CR on 38.101-2: Transmit ON/OFF time mask for

UL CA, Nokia
R4-1807857, Draft CR on 38.101-2: Occupied BW for UL CA, Nokia
R4-1808101, Draft CR to 38.101-2: On EVM Averaging Length,
Wording, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1808105, Configured maximum output power for FR2, Ericsson
R4-1808124, draft CR on UE RF requirement for UE type 2 in FR2,
LG Electronics
R4-1808125, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2: Minimum output and OFF
Power, Nokia
R4-1808147, Draft CR for NR FR2 CA BW class modifications,
MediaTek Inc.
R4-1808148, EVM equaliser spectral flatness for FR2, Ericsson
R4-1808149, UE Shaping Filter Requirement for pi/2 BPSK, Indian
Institute of Tech (M)
R4-1808152, Draft CR for Finalizing UE RF Requirement for FWA,
Samsung
R4-1808266, Draft CR for TS 38.101-2: Channel and sync raster
corrections (5.4), Ericsson
R4-1808545, Draft CR on UE RF requirement for UE type 3 in FR2,
Verizon
R4-1808546, Power class 3 Spherical coverage introduction and
peak EIRP requirement update, Qualcomm
R4-1808206, Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 Type 1 UE Power Control,
Qualcomm
R4-1808208, Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 Type 1 UE CA EIS update,
Qualcomm
R4-1808191, TP to TS38.101-2 - UE ON/OFF masks, Ericsson
R4-1807102, draft CR introduction completed band combinations
37.865-01-01 -> 38.101-2, Ericsson
2018-09 RAN#81 RP-181896 0015 F Big CR for 38.101-2 15.3.0
Endorced draft CRs from RAN4#NR-AH-1807

R4-1809336, Draft CR on UL RMC for FR2 RF tests, Qualcomm
Incorporated
R4-1809338, Draft CR on NR UE REFSENS SNR FRC for FR2, Intel
Corporation
R4-1809397, Draft CR on measurement of receiver characteristics
for FR2 RF Tests, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1809566, Draft CR on OCNG pattern for FR2 REFSENS test,
Endorced draft CR s from RAN4#88
R4-1809817, TP to TS 38.101-2 on ON/OFF time mask, Intel

Corporation
R4-1809976, Draft CR for TS 38.101-2: Channel raster corrections
(5.4.2), Ericsson
R4-1810092, Draft CR TS 38.101-2 - UE ON-OFF mask clean up,
Ericsson
R4-1810211, Draft CR for TS 38.101-2: MPR inner and outer RB
allocations formula correction, MediaTek Inc.
R4-1810228, draft CR on UL-MIMO requirement for Power Class 2
in FR2, LG Electronics Inc
R4-1810373, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Corrections on symbols and
abbreviations in section 3, ZTE Corporation
R4-1810805, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2: Spurious emissions, Nokia
R4-1810863, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Addition of Transmit Modulation
Annex, Rohde & Schwarz
R4-1811026, Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 UE CA Transmit Signal
Quality update, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1811104, Finalization of SEM requirements in FR2, Qualcomm
Incorporated
R4-1811140, FR2 ULMIMO Updates and enhancements, Qualcomm
Incorporated
R4-1811322, Draft CR to 38.101-2: REFSENS of power class 1,
Intel Corporation
R4-1811456, Draft CR on DL Physical Channel for FR2 RF tests,
Qualcomm Inc
R4-1811460, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Correct both Table 5.5A.2-1 and
Table 5.5A.2-2, Verizon
R4-1811489, Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 Power Control, Qualcomm
Incorporated
R4-1811499, Implementation of additional requirement to protect
passive EESS in 23.6-24GHz, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1811515, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2: Clarification on OCNG,
Keysight Technologies UK Ltd
ETSI
R4-1811517, Draft CR on NR DL FRCs for FR2 UE RF

requirements, Intel Corporation
R4-1811519, Draft CR to 38.101-2: On FR2 MPR for single CC PC1
and PC3, Qualcomm
R4-1811520, Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 Max. Input Power,
R4-1811524, Clearification of UL MIMO for FR2, OPPO
R4-1811551, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2 on channel bandwidth and
spacing descriptions, Ericsson
R4-1811554, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Corrections on description of
channel raster entries, ZTE Corporation
R4-1811802, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2 update the Pumax tolerance
table for configured transmitted power, Intel Corporation
R4-1811807, Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 UE Transmit Signal Quality
update, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1811813, Correction on UE transmitter requirement for FR2,
CATT
R4-1811817, Updated ON/OFF mask for FR2, vivo
R4-1811800, DRAFT CR for PCmax FR2 correction, Qualcomm
Incorporated
2018-12 RAN#82 RP-182899 0016 F Endorced draft CR s from RAN4#88Bis: 15.4.0
R4-1812122, Draft CR for FR2 ACLR Measurement BW , Qualcomm
R4-1812134, CR on Out of Band Blocking for FR2, Intel Corporation
R4-1812426, draft CR of MPR for Power Class 2 in FR2 , LG
Electronics
R4-1812428, draft CR of transmit signal quality for Power Class 2 in
FR2, LG Electronics
R4-1812453, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2 Adjust placement of 0dB MPR
reference waveform, Intel Corporation
R4-1812495, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Corrections on channel raster &
SS raster, ZTE Corporation
R4-1813470, draftCR on applicability of TDD configuratiin for CA in
TS 38.101-2, Huawei
R4-1813472, draftCR on CA spectrum Emission for TS 38.101-2,
Huawei
R4-1813473, draftCR on coherent UL MIMO for TS 38.101-2,
Huawei
R4-1813527, Correction to FR2 spurious emission requirement,
Nokia
R4-1813585, Draft CR to Specify UL Power for FR2 REFSENS Test
Cases, Keysight
R4-1813815, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Corrections on configurations for
intra-band non-contiguous CA, ZTE Corporation
R4-1814149, Changes to FR2 UL MIMO, OPPO
R4-1814180, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2 on channel arrangement
descriptions, LG Electronics Inc.
R4-1814181, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Corrections on the descriptions
of UE channel bandwidth for CA, ZTE Corporation
2 R4-1814163, draft CR of operating band for Power Class 2 in FR2,
LG Electronics
R4-1813834, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Update of Annex F, Rohde &
Schwarz
R4-1814164, draftCR on MPR for TS 38.101-2, Huawei
R4-1814165, Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 Power Control for CA,
R4-1814170, Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 UL Config for EIS Testing,
Endorsed draft CR's from RAN4#89

R4-1815951, dCR on TS38.101-2 merging draft CRs from
RAN4#89, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1814497, Correction on UL MIMO requirement for PC1 UE,
Samsung
R4-1814585, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2 UL CA power control in FR2,
Intel Corporation
R4-1814698, Draft CR to TS38.101-2 updating references, Apple
Inc.
R4-1815623, Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 Max. Input Power UL
Configuration, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1815801, draft CR editorial correction in 38.101-2, Ericsson
R4-1815810, draft Rel-15 CR to 38.101-2 to include n260 fallbacks
needed, Ericsson
R4-1815942, dCR on P-MPR for FR2, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1815943, dCD Coherent UL MIMO parameters for FR2,
R4-1816205, Draft CR to TS38.101-2 correcting the Pcmax
requirement, Apple Inc.
ETSI
R4-1816206, draft CR on Pcmax for ULCA and limitation on max

aggregated ULCA BW, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1816217, Draft CR to 38.101-2 on UE maximum output power
with additional requirements, ZTE Corporation
R4-1816218, Draft CR for Introducing missing requirement for power
class 4 in FR2 for TS 38.101-2, NTT DOCOMO, INC.
R4-1816219, draft CR of MPR for Power Class 2 in FR2, LG
Electronics
R4-1816220, Draft CR to 38.101-2: On FR2 CA MPR v2, Qualcomm
Incorporated
R4-1816239, Draft CR to 38.101-2: On FR2 EESS A-MPR for n258,
R4-1816245, Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 EIS DL Signal Polarization
Clarification , Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1816257, Draft CR to TS38.101-2 to correct UL CA scope for
FR2 in Rel-15, Apple Inc.
R4-1816605, TDD configuration for UE Tx test in FR2, Ericsson
R4-1816664, Draft CR to 38.101-2 (5.3.4) RB alignment, Huawei
R4-1816751, Draft CR for RF exposure compliance in TS38.101-2,
LG Electronics France
R4-1816626, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2: Introducing multi-band
applicability for PC3, Apple Inc.
R4-1816634, Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 EIS Spherical Coverage
Requirement, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1816639, Verification of beam correspondence, Ericsson, Sony
R4-1816633, draft CR on UE type for Power Class 2 in FR2, LG
Electronics
R4-1816644, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2: Temperature Condition for
testing EIRP Spherical Coverage requirement, Apple Inc.
RAN4#90 plus PC3 MPR changes to accommodate FR2 OBW
Endorced draft CRs from RAN4#90

R4-1900049, Draft CR on UL RMC for FR2 UE RF Tests, Qualcomm
Incorporated
R4-1900050, Draft CR on DL RMC for FR2 UE RF Tests, Qualcomm
Incorporated
R4-1900131, draft CR to 38101-2 Correction to EVM equalizer
spectrum flatness for Pi2 BPSK, Intel Corporation
R4-1900132, draft CR to 38101-2 FR2 transmit modulation quality
for CA, Intel Corporation
R4-1900254, Draft CR on clarification of maxUplinkDutyCycle in
FR2, OPPO
R4-1900301, Draft CR: Introduction of Annex on Characteristics of
the Interfering Signal, Samsung
R4-1900386, CR to 38.101-2 on CA BW Classes fallback groups,
Intel Corporation
R4-1900443, CR to chance Annex E2.1, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1900509, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2 on BCS definition for intra-
band non-contiguous CA, ZTE Corporation
R4-1900531, draft CR on A-MPR for power class 2 in FR2, LG
Electronics
1 R4-1900533, draft CR on maximum output power reduction for CA
for power class 2 in FR2, LG Electronics
R4-1900535, draft CR on A-MPR for CA for power class 2 in FR2,
LG Electronics
R4-1900542, Draft CR on Measurement period of PRACH time
mask, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1900677, Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 ULMIMO max. output
power, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1900674, Draft CR to 38.101-2: UL config for DL NC CA,
R4-1900678, Draft CR to 38.101-2: EVM Requirement for PRACH,
R4-1900679,Draft CR to 38.101-2: IBB requirement update,
R4-1900680, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Complete Pmin requirement for
CA, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1900728, Update to PRACH EVM window length for FR2, Rohde
& Schwarz
R4-1900736, Draft CR on editorial error of TS38.101-2, LG
Electronics Inc.
R4-1900755, Draft CR on spurious emission limit in 38.101-2,
R4-1902005, Draft CR to 38.101-2: Add annex for UE coordinate
system, Qualcomm Incorporated
ETSI
R4-1902152, Editorial corrections for 38.101-2, Qualcomm

Incorporated
R4-1902180, Draft CR to 38.101-2: correction of the relationship
between minimum requirements and test requirements, Apple Inc.
R4-1902345, draft_CR TS 38.101-2 FR1 frequency range extension,
Skyworks Solutions Inc.
R4-1902474, Draft CR to 38.101-2: correction of multi-band aspects
in REFSENS for PC3, Apple Inc.
R4-1902490, draftCR on maximum output power for TS 38.101-2,
Huawei
R4-1902491, Draft CR for Multi-band relaxation to TS 38.101-2, NTT
DOCOMO, INC.
R4-1902492, Draft CR on max input power in FR2, OPPO
R4-1902590, Draft CR to TS 38.101-2: Introduction of the
requirement on beam correspondence, Apple Inc
Further changes in RAN#83:

Changes in Section 6.2.2.0 to modify the MPR=0dB waveform and
Section 6.2.2.3 to modify the MPR tables to accommodate the OBW
requirements
RAN4#90bis and RAN4#91
Endorsed draft CRs from RAN4#90Bis:

R4-1902932: Draft CR to TS 38.101-2 Correction to Pcmax,
Intel Corporation
R4-1902976 Draft CR on PRACH and PUCCH format
description for EVM in FR2 Anritsu corporation
R4-1903121 Draft CR on DL power allocation for TS 38.101-2
Intel Corporation
R4-1903242 Adding BCS definition in TS38.101-2 CATT
R4-1903474 draft CR of in-band emission for FR2 PC2 LG
Electronics
R4-1903888 Draft CR: Alignment of FR2 DL scheduling of DL
RMC with UL RMCEricsson
R4-1904001 Draft CR for TS 38.101-2 – UE coordinate system
Rohde & Schwarz
R4-1904411 draft Rel-15 CR for editorial corrections in 38.101-2
Ericsson
R4-1904553 Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 power dynamics DTX
removal Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1904930 Draft CR to 38.101-2: Updating MPR wording in
ULMIMO section Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1904931 Draft CR to clarify frequency of carrier leakage in
RBs for FR2 Anritsu corporation
R4-1904932 Draft CR on editorial error of TS38.101-2 LG
Electronics France
R4-1904933 Draft CR on UE optional bandwidth for FR2
Huawei, HiSilicon
R4-1904956 Draft CR for TS 38.101-2: Corrections to
configurations for intra-band non-contiguous CA
MediaTek Inc.
R4-1904961 Draft CR for TR38.101-2 – Update to EVM
averaging Rohde & Schwarz
R4-1904962 Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 ULMIMO EVM
R4-1904966 Draft CR to TS 38.101-2 CA maximum input level
Intel Corporation
R4-1904986 Draft CR for TS 38.101-2: Corrections to EVM
equalizer spectrum flatness requirements
MediaTek Inc.
R4-1904994 draft CR to 38.101-2 Correction to ACS and In-band
Blocking notes Intel Corporation
R4-1905003 Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 PC3 and PC1 MPR
R4-1905005 Draft CR for 38.101-2 frequency separation class
Huawei, HiSilicon
Endorsed draft CRs from RAN4#91:

R4-1905504 Change description 4.2(d) in Applicability of
minimum requirements for TS 38.101-2 vivo
R4-1905685 Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 Sensitivity Qualcomm
Incorporated
R4-1905764 draft CR to 38.101-2 UE maximum output power
reduction for UL-MIMO Intel Corporation
R4-1905765 draft CR to 38.101-2 UE maximum output power for
UL-MIMO Intel Corporation
ETSI
R4-1905796 Correction to a description of PRB for in-band

emission in FR2 Anritsu Corporation
R4-1905798 Correction to power control in FR2 Anritsu
Corporation
R4-1905821 draft CR of loosening EIS for FR2 PC2 LG
Electronics Inc.
R4-1907003 Draft CR for editorial corrections in TS 38.101-2
Google Inc.
R4-1907420 draft CR of simple application for FR2 PC2 and 4
requirements with PC3 same requirements LG
Electronics Inc.
R4-1907423 Draft CR for TS 38.101-2 Correction of channel
bandwidth set for NR CA Huawei, HiSilicon,
CMCC
R4-1907437 Draft CR to 38.101-2: Insert definitions Qualcomm
Incorporated
R4-1907443 Draft CR to TS38.101-2 Complete FR2 MPR/A-
MPR Intel Corporation
R4-1907444 Amendment of the relative power tolerance
requirement Ericsson, Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1907446 Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 CA REFESNS
R4-1907447 Draft CR to 38.101-2 on UL RMC slot patterns
Apple Inc.
R4-1907466 Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 CA MPR enhancement
R4-1907468 Draft CR to 38.101-2: FR2 MPR Wording CleanUp
R4-1907473 Draft CR to TS38.101-2 on FR2 PC3 UE
maxUplinkDutyCycle Nokia, Nokia Shanghai Bell
R4-1907478 Draft CR to TS 38.101-2 on configurations for intra-
band contiguous CA ZTE Corporation
R4-1907493 Correction to Pcmax and Pumax for CA Ericsson
R4-1907611 Draft CR to TS38.101-2 on beam correspondence
Samsung, Apple, Verizon
R4-1907688 Correction to CA carrier spacing Ericsson
2019-06 RAN#84 RP-191241 0020 B CR to REL-16 TS 38.101-2: Implementation of endorsed draft CRs 16.0.0
on NR combinations and dual Connectivity combinations
2019-06 RAN#84 RP-191241 0022 B CR introduction completed band combinations 38.716-01-01 -> 16.0.0
1
38.101-2
2019-09 RAN#85 RP-192049 0028 A CR to TS 38.101-2: Implementation of endorsed draft CRs from 16.1.0
RAN4#92 (Rel-16)
- Mirrors changes in R4-1910352 for Rel-15 TS 38.101-2
Endorsed draft CRs from RAN4#92

R4-1907999 Draft CR for NR non-contiguous CA configuration
Verizon, Nokia, Ericsson, Qualcomm
R4-1908082 draft CR to TS 38.101-2 on channel spacing for CA
Samsung, ZTE
R4-1908137 Update to FR2 EVM definition ROHDE &
SCHWARZ
R4-1908153 dCR to 38.101-2: Editorial corrections for 38.101-2
R4-1908573 Draft CR to TS 38.101-2: corrections on Rx
requirements for intra-band CA ZTE Corporation
R4-1908633 Draft CR to TS38.101-2: Corrections on EVM
window length (Section F.5) ZTE Corporation
R4-1908708 Draft CR to TS38.101-2: corrections on the receiver
spurious emission (section 7.9) ZTE Corporation
R4-1909117 Draft CR for 38.101-2 applicability for intra-band CA
Huawei
R4-1909316 Draft CR to TS 38.101-2 on symbols correction ZTE
Corporation
R4-1910235 Draft CR to TS38.101-2 for Rx RF requirements LG
Electronics Finland
R4-1910238 CR for Handling of fallbacks for combined
contiguous and non-contiguous CA in FR2 Apple
R4-1910241 Draft CR to TS 38.101-2 on NR CA configurations
for FR2 ZTE Corporation
R4-1910259 dCR to 38.101-2: Reference signal clarifications
R4-1910261 dCR to 38.101-2: FR2 AMPR updates, including
ERC 74-01 changes Qualcomm Incorporated
R4-1910287 dCR to 38.101-2: FR2 CA MPR refinement
ETSI
R4-1910328 Draft CR to TS 38.101-2: Corrections for UL and DL

RMC for FR2 tests Intel Corporation
R4-1910333 Draft CR for 38.101-2 reference measurement
channel for beam correspondence Huawei
R4-1910334 Draft CR for TS38.101-2, Editorial corrections
CATT
R4-1910412 Draft CR for 38.101-2 correction for channel raster
Huawei
R4-1910614 Draft CR for TS 38.101-2: Channel spacing for
adjacent NR carriers ZTE
Conditional agreements for BC for PC1/2/4 from R4-1902252
2019-09 RAN#85 RP-192027 0025 F Minor corrections of intra-band non-contiguous CA operating bands 16.1.0
1
in TS 38.101-2
2019-09 RAN#85 RP-192027 0026 D Rel-16 CR for further simplification of 38.101-2 Table 5.5A.2-2 16.1.0
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193030 0032 A CR to 38.101-2: DMRS exceptions 16.2.0
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193030 0036 A Sync raster to SSB resource element mapping 16.2.0
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193030 0039 A CR to 38.101-2 (Rel-16) to clarify measurement interval and 16.2.0
observation window on frequency error
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193031 0041 A CR to TS 38.101-2 on beam correspondence side condition 16.2.0
applicability
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193031 0044 A CR to TS 38.101-2: Correctin on FInterferer (offset) for CA ACS 16.2.0
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193030 0048 A CR for TS 38.101-2: Editorial correction on MPR for contiguous CA 16.2.0
notation
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193031 0050 A CR for TS 38.101-2: CA bandwidth class definition amendment 16.2.0
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193030 0052 A CR to TS 38.101-2 on corrections to channel raster entries for NR 16.2.0
band (Rel-16)
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193030 0056 A CR to transmit modulation quality in FR2 16.2.0
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193030 0058 A Frequency separation class clarification REL-16 16.2.0
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193012 0064 B CR introduction completed band combinations 38.716-01-01 -> 16.2.0
38.101-2
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193011 0065 F CR to 38.101-2-g10 Corrections to maximum output power reduction 16.2.0
1
for power class 3
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193030 0067 A CR for TS 38.101-2: power classes and maxUplinkDutyCycle-FR2 16.2.0
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193031 0074 A CR for agreed MPR CA for FR2 intra-band contiguous 16.2.0
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193031 0075 1 A CR for 38.101-2 on NS_202 band defintion 16.2.0
2019-12 RAN#86 RP-193031 0077 A CR to TS 38.101-2: Correctin on CA NRACLR 16.2.0
2020-03 RAN#87 RP-200395 0080 A Correction of the FR2 RMC slot patterns for MOP test cases 16.3.0
2020-03 RAN#87 RP-200395 0099 A CR to 38.101-2 (Rel-16) MPR for CA 16.3.0
2020-03 RAN#87 RP-200395 0106 F CR FR2 CA tables REL16 16.3.0
2020-03 RAN#87 RP-200395 0108 A CR to TS 38.101-2 on corrections to intra-band contiguous CA for 16.3.0
FR2 bands (Rel-16)
2020-03 RAN#87 RP-200395 0110 A CR to 38.101-2: Align Rx CA requirements structure with TS38.101- 16.3.0
1
2020-03 RAN#87 RP-200395 0114 A CR for TS 38.101-2: Editorial addition of CBW and CABW definitions 16.3.0
in Abbreviations section
2020-03 RAN#87 RP-200395 0118 A CR to TS 38.101-2: Correction on FRC table for FR2 DL 64QAM 16.3.0
2020-03 RAN#87 RP-200469 0126 2 A CR for 38.101-2 side condition for BC_Rel16 16.3.0
2020-03 RAN#87 RP-200380 0132 F Editorial corrections 16.3.0
2020-03 RAN#87 RP-200378 0133 F Correction of Inner Allocation Definition for Powerclass 3 16.3.0
2020-03 RAN#87 RP-200395 0136 A R16 CR to 38.101-2: TRS and SSB configurations in FR2 16.3.0
2020-04 0147 A Change history corrected 16.3.1
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0148 F CR on ACLR MBW definition in FR2 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-201046 0151 A CR to 38.101-2: Revision to Multiband Relaxations 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0164 A CR to 38.101-2 on correction of reference point for beam 16.4.0
correspondence side conditions R16
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0168 A CR to 38.101-2 to correct Link and Meas Angles 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0170 A CR to 38.101-2: NS_202 update after changes to EU regulations 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0172 A CR for TS 38.101-2: Intra-band non-contiguous CA configuration 16.4.0
clarifications
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0174 A CR for TS 38.101-2: Correction for configured transmitted power for 16.4.0
CA
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0175 F CR for TS 38.101-2: Clarifications on transmitter power for receiver 16.4.0
requirements
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200959 0181 A CR for TS 38.101-2: Intra-band non-contiguous CA configuration 16.4.0
clarifications
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0183 A Update of CSI-RS definition for FR2 DL RMCs 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0184 F Correction to FR2 QPSK UL RMC 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0188 B Correction of Rel-16 UL RMCs 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200972 0193 F CR to TS 38.101-2: Introduction of FR2 DL 256QAM 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0198 A ACS requirement correction 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0200 A CR for intra-band CA DL Rx requirement-FR2_Rel-16 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0208 A CR for modified MPR_Rel-16 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0162 1 B CR to TS38.101-2 on Rel-15 beam correspondence 16.4.0
ETSI
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200959 0209 A CR to 38.101-2: Introduce mmWave intra-band uplink CA 16.4.0
configurations
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0161 1 B CR to K1 value in Annex A.3.3 of 38.101-2 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-201046 0211 A CR to 38.101-2 on FR2 frequency separation class enhancement 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200985 0191 2 B CR on Pcmax correction for CA 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-200978 0155 1 B CR to 38.101-2 for Introduction of band n259 16.4.0
2020-06 RAN#88 RP-201046 0147 A FR2 new MPR and modifiedmpr 16.4.0
ETSI
History
Document history
V16.4.0 July 2020 Publication
ETSI

Ts 13810102v160400p

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ts 13810102v160400p

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ts 13810102v160400p

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ETSI TS 138 101-2 V16.4.

650 Route des Lucioles

Tel.: +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16

Siret N° 348 623 562 00017 - NAF 742 C

The present document can be downloaded from:

Intellectual Property Rights

Modal verbs terminology

6.2 Transmitter power ............................................................................................................................................ 47

6.4.2.3.5 In-band emissions for power class 4 ................................................................................................ 83

6.6.4.2 Beam correspondence tolerance for power class 3................................................................................ 99

Annex A (normative): Measurement channels ................................................................................116

A.2.3.5 CP-OFDM QPSK ..................................................................................................................................... 126

Annex B (informative): Void ...............................................................................................................142

Annex D (normative): Characteristics of the interfering signal ....................................................144

Annex F (normative): Transmit modulation ...................................................................................147

Modified MPR behavior .................................................................................................................................155

x the first digit:

1 presented to TSG for information;

2 presented to TSG for approval;

3 or greater indicates TSG approved document under change control.

In the present document, modal verbs have the following meanings:

shall indicates a mandatory requirement to do something

shall not indicates an interdiction (prohibition) to do something

should indicates a recommendation to do something

should not indicates a recommendation not to do something

may indicates permission to do something

need not indicates permission not to do something

can indicates that something is possible

cannot indicates that something is impossible

The constructions "is" and "is not" do not indicate requirements.

- For a specific reference, subsequent revisions do not apply.

[1] 3GPP TR 21.905: "Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications".

[7] ITU-R Recommendation SM.329-10, "Unwanted emissions in the spurious domain"

[9] 3GPP TS 38.211: "NR; Physical channels and modulation".

[10] 3GPP TS 38.213: "NR; Physical layer procedures for control".

[11] 3GPP TS 38.215: "NR; Physical layer measurements".

3 Definitions, symbols and abbreviations

NOTE: Carriers aggregated in each band can be contiguous or non-contiguous.

NOTE 2: Isotropic directivity is equal in all directions (i.e. 0 dBi).

NOTE: Carriers aggregated in each band can be contiguous or non-contiguous.

Vehicular UE: A UE embedded in a vehicle

∆EIRPBC The beam correspondence tolerance, where ∆EIRPBC = EIRP2 – EIRP1

FC,block, low Fc of the lowest transmitted/received carrier in a sub-block.

ACLR Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio

4.1 Relationship between minimum requirements and test

4.2 Applicability of minimum requirements

4.3 Specification suffix information

Table 4.3-1: Definition of suffixes

5 Operating bands and channel arrangement

Table 5.1-1: Definition of frequency ranges

The present specification covers FR2 operating bands.

5.2 Operating bands

Table 5.2-1: NR operating bands in FR2

5.2A Operating bands for CA

Table 5.2A.1-1: Intra-band contiguous CA operating bands in FR2

5.2D Operating bands for UL MIMO

Table 5.2D-1: NR UL MIMO operating bands

5.3 UE Channel bandwidth

5.3.2 Maximum transmission bandwidth configuration

Foffset,low = (NRB,low12 + 1)SCSlow/2 + BWGB (MHz)

Foffset,high = (NRB,high12 - 1)SCShigh/2 + BWGB (MHz)

Foffset,block,low = (NRB,low12 + 1)SCSlow/2 + BWGB (MHz)

Foffset,block,high = (NRB,high12 - 1)SCShigh/2 + BWGB (MHz)